Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning and control lights 10
Gauges 15
Entertainment Systems 17
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 17
CD changer 21
Navigation system 25
Climate Controls 88
Dual automatic temperature control 88
Rear window defroster 91
Lights 92
Headlamps 92
Turn signal control 95
Bulb replacement 96
Driver Controls 101
Windshield wiper/washer control 101
Steering wheel adjustment 102
Power windows 114
Mirrors 115
Speed control 117
Message center 122
Locks and Security 130
Locks 130
Anti-theft system 141
Table of Contents
1
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 146
Seating 146
Safety restraints 151
Air bags 165
Child restraints 172
Driving 184
Starting 184
Brakes 188
Traction control 190
Air suspension 192
Transmission operation 192
Vehicle loading 199
Trailer towing 202
Recreational towing 204
Roadside Emergencies 206
Getting roadside assistance 206
Hazard flasher switch 207
Fuel pump shut-off switch 207
Fuses and relays 208
Changing tires 216
Lug Nut Torque 222
Jump starting 222
Wrecker towing 227
Customer Assistance 228
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 236
Cleaning 237
Table of Contents
2
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 243
Engine compartment 245
Engine oil 246
Battery 250
Fuel information 258
Air filter(s) 272
Tire Information 274
Refill capacities 287
Lubricant specifications 288
Accessories 296
Index 298
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
Introduction
4
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
5
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
6
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Traction Control AdvanceTrac娂
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap Low tire warning
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
9
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
10
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or
in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system
warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately
from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake
indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the
supplemental restraint system has been detected.
ABS
AIR
BAG
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
11
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt, refer to the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Autolamp: Illuminates when the
autolamps are turned on.
Traction control娂 active: Flashes
when the Traction control娂 system
is active. If the light remains on,
have the system serviced
immediately, refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
12
Air suspension: Illuminates when
the air suspension is turned OFF or
the air suspension system requires
servicing.
Washer: Illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned OFF
using the transmission control
switch (TCS), refer to the Driving
chapter. If the light flashes steadily
or does not illuminate, have the
transmission serviced soon, or
damage may occur.
Door ajar: Illuminates when any
door is open (or not fully closed).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
13
Trunk ajar: Illuminates when the
trunk is not completely closed. This
light will flash and sound a tone for
one second, then the light remains
on.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Turn signal chime (if equipped): Sounds when the turn signal lever
has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is
driven more than 0.8 km (1/2 mile).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
14
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Select SPEED from the message
center to display the digital
speedometer on the left hand side
of the cluster. Refer to the Message
Center in the Driver Controls
chapter for more information on the
Trip A and B feature.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Refer to Filling the tank in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel
door is located.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
16
AUDIOPHILE AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD
SHUF
DSP
SEL
BAL
BASS
FADE
TREB
SCAN
CD
AM/FM
SEEK
REW
FF
COMP
5
6
3
4
1
2
SIDE
TUNE
TAPE
RDS
AUTO
SET
2
7
9
10
12
1
6
11
13
14
3
4
5
8
17
19
15
16
18
MUTE
SHUF
SEL
BAL
BASS
FADE
TREB
SCAN
CD
AM/FM
SEEK
REW
FF
COMP
5
6
3
4
1
2
SIDE
TUNE
TAPE
RDS
AUTO
SET
2
7
9
10
12
1
6
11
13
14
3
4
5
8
17
19
15
16
18
MUTE
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Entertainment Systems
17
1. Eject: Press to eject a tape.
2. Eject: Press to eject a CD.
3. Bass: Allows you to increase or
decrease the audio system’s bass
output. Press BASS then press SEL
to decrease
or increase the bass levels.
Treble: Allows you to increase or
decrease the audio system’s treble
output. Press TREB then press SEL
to decrease
or increase the treble levels.
4. Balance: Allows you to shift
speaker sound between the right
and left speakers. Press BAL then
press SEL to shift sound to the left
or right .
Fade: Allows you to shift speaker
sound between the front and rear
speakers. Press FADE then press
SEL to shift the sound to the rear
or the front .
5. COMP (Compression): In CD
mode, press to bring soft and loud
passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play CD
tracks in random order.
6. Select: Use to adjust bass, treble,
balance and fade levels.
7. Side 1–2: Press to change sides
on the tape.
Dolby:
Dolby威 noise
reduction: Reduces tape noise and
hiss; press to activate/deactivate.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18
8. REW (Rewind): Works in tape
and CD modes.
In tape mode, radio play continues
until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the
tape is reached.
In CD mode, REW control reverses the CD within the current track.
FF (fast forward): Works in tape
and CD modes.
In the tape mode, tape direction
automatically reverses when the end of the tape is reached.
In CD mode, FF advances the CD within the current track.
9. Digital signal processing (if
equipped): Press to adjust the
occupancy modes between the
following:
• ALL SEATS
• DRIVER SEAT
• REAR SEATS
RDS: (Radio Data System): Allows
you to access FM stations which are
RDS- equipped. Press RDS then
SEL to select from:
Traffic — Allows you to receive traffic announcements and control their
volume level. Traffic information is not available in most U.S.
markets.
Show — Allows you to view the frequency and program type of the
chosen radio station.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
Setting the clock: Your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash mounted
clock. Refer to Clock in the Driver Controls Chapter for further
information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
19
10. Autoset: Press to set first six
strong stations into AM, FM1 or
FM2 memory buttons; press again to
return to normal stations.
11. Scan: Works in radio, tape and
CD modes. Press SCAN for a brief
sampling of radio stations, tape
selections or CD tracks.
12. Seek: Works in radio, tape and
CD modes. Press to access the
previous
or next listenable
radio station, tape selection or CD track.
13. Tune: Works in radio mode.
Press to manually advance up or
down the frequency band.
14. AM/FM/CD: Press AM/FM to
select a radio frequency. Press while
in tape or CD mode to return to
radio mode. Press CD to enter CD mode and to play a CD already in the
system.
15. Mute mode: Press to mute the
playing media.
16. Power/volume: Press to turn
the system on/off. Turn to
raise/lower the volume.
17. Tape: Press to play the tape.
18. CD door: Insert the disc with the playing side down and printed side
up.
19. Tape door: Insert the tape facing the right.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
20
REAR CONSOLE AUDIO CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
• NEXT: Press to access the next
radio memory preset, the next
CD track or the next tape
selection.
• VOL: Press the up arrow to
increase the volume or the down
arrow to decrease the volume.
• MODE: Press to toggle through
AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if
equipped) modes.
ACCESSORY DELAY
With accessory delay, the window switches, moon roof (if equipped) and
audio system may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch
is turn to the OFF position or until any door is opened.
CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your CD changer is located in the
trunk.
1. Slide the door to access the CD
changer magazine.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21
2. Press to eject the magazine.
3. Pull the lever to remove a CD
tray from the magazine.
4. Insert one disc into each CD tray
of the magazine (up to 6 discs).
Ensure that the label side is facing
up.
If you pull too hard on the disc
holder, the disc holder may come
completely out of the magazine. If
this happens, reinsert the disc
holder back into the magazine.
5. Insert each CD tray, with the disc
loaded, all the way into the CD
magazine.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
22
6. Insert the CD magazine into the
changer.
7. Slide the door to the left to close.
Use only compact discs containing
this mark.
The magazine does not need to be full for the changer to operate.
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the changer. The
magazine may be stored in the glove compartment when not being used.
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off.
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or
discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may
occur.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
23
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
24
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
LINCOLN NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Lincoln Navigation System which
allows you to listen to the radio, play CDs and also navigate the vehicle
using a navigation DVD.
Your Lincoln Navigation System has a large range of features, yet is easy
to use. Guidance is shown on the display screen and is supplemented
with voice prompts. The display screen provides full information for
operating the system through use of menus, text screens and map
displays. Screen selections are made by touching the desired selection on
the screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
25
1. VOL-PUSH: Press to turn the system ON/OFF. Turn to adjust the
audio volume level.
2. AUDIO: Press to enter audio mode and access radio, CD, CDDJ, DVD
(if equipped) settings.
3. MAP: Press to enter map mode and view your current vehicle position
on the map. Press and hold to obtain additional position information.
This will not function without a map DVD loaded.
4. DEST: Press to enter Destination Entry mode. This allows you to
enter a destination and route to it. With an active route, pressing DEST
allows the user to request a Detour, display entire route, select route
preferences, or change or cancel the destination. This will not function
without a map DVD loaded.
5. MENU: Press to access system settings such as display, brightness,
clock mode (if equipped), etc.
6. CD OPEN CLOSE: Press to open/close the display screen and access
the CD player.
Cold temperature advisory
When operating the system below 32° Fahrenheit (0° Celsius), the
display screen requires 20–30 minutes warm-up to achieve maximum
brightness. Ensure that the system display setting is set to DAY mode
until maximum brightness is achieved (refer to Menu mode section).
Once maximum brightness is achieved, revert to AUTO mode display
setting.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
26
Initial map display
After pressing AGREE to the initial
WARNING screen, you will move
into the initial map screen which
shows the current vehicle location.
Pressing the globe icon will take you
to the user settings — audible
feedback, navigation units, language
and clock (if equipped).
Quick Start — How to get going
To play a radio station:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on.
2. Press AUDIO.
3. Select AM, FM1 or FM2.
4. Press TUNE to adjust manually up (
) or down ( ) the frequency
band.
5. Press SEEK to find the next strong station up (
) or down ( ).
Note: If PTY (program type) is selected, the station selection will be
limited. Refer to Program Type (PTY) for further information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
27
To play a previously loaded CD:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on.
2. Press AUDIO.
3. Press CD to select a CD which is already loaded. (NO CD will appear
in the display if there are no CDs loaded into the system). Use the
controls (1–6) to select the desired CD.
4. CD will begin to play.
To load CDs:
1. Press CD OPEN CLOSE at the bottom of the screen to load a CD.
(The screen will open).
2. Press LOAD and select the desired slot. Or, press and hold LOAD to
auto load all available slots. The slot indicator lights blink rate will
increase when the system is ready to accept a disc. Push CD OPEN
CLOSE to close the screen. Once closed, the CD will begin to play.
3. Use the touch controls to advance tracks, scan, pause, etc.
To use the Navigation system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on, and the navigation DVD is
loaded into the navigation DVD player.
Refer to Loading the map DVD or Navigation system — DVD location
in the Index for your vehicle’s navigation DVD location.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
28
2. Press DEST. The warning screen will appear. After reading, press
AGREE. The screen will show a map with your current location. Press
DEST again.
3. Select the desired type of
destination entry. You may select
“Address”, “Point of Interest”,
“Emergency” or “Previous Dest”
from the first screen.
Or, press “
Next Page” to access
selections of “Memory Point”,
“Select from map”, “Freeway
Ent/Exit” and “Special Memory
Points.” After making your selection,
enter any required information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
29
4. Press DEST at the bottom of the
map screen.
5. Choose the desired route by
pressing the NEXT button (if it
appears). There can be up to three
alternative routes.
6. Press START to begin the
navigation guidance.
To adjust the voice guidance volume:
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav Menu” at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.
3. Press On/Off to turn the voice
guidance option on/off. Use the
numeric keys (1–7) to determine
the volume level of the guidance
voice prompts.
Voice activated commands (if equipped)
Your Lincoln Navigation System (LNS) may be equipped with a voice
activated feature which allows you to “speak” certain commands to the
system. Speaking clearly will help to ensure that the system correctly
responds to your commands. Ensure that the commands are spoken in
English (not any other language) and that they are spoken exactly as
they are written, or they may not function.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
30
Press VOICE briefly (on your steering wheel controls) and the voice
icon
appears on the Navigation display. Press the REPEAT button or
arrow on your steering wheel controls to hear the previous command
repeated from the navigation system.
The voice activated command feature will not operate if a map DVD is
not inserted into the navigation DVD unit.
At any time, you may say these commands to change modes:
• Radio • Audio on
• AM • Audio off
• FM1 • Power off
• FM2 • CD Changer (if equipped)
• CD • DVD (if equipped)
• Power on
During normal radio operation, you may say:
• Seek up • Seek down
Disc operation commands you may say when using a rear seat DVD (if
equipped):
• Track up • Track down
• Previous track • Disc up
• Disc down • Next disc
• Previous disc
During CDDJ or in-dash CD play, you may say:
• Track up • Track down
• Previous track • Disc up
• Next disc • Disc down
• Previous disc
To change the screen display, you may say the following commands:
• Screen off • Screen day mode
• Day mode on • Screen night mode
• Night mode on • Screen auto mode
• Auto mode on
Note: If you say “Screen off”, you must touch the screen in order to
activate the screen again. The screen will not turn on again with a voice
command.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
31
Commands that jump over screens:
• Current position • Current location
• Map
While in navigation map mode, the following commands are available:
• Zoom in • Zoom out
• Minimum scale • Maximum scale
• North up • Change to North up
• Heading up • Change to heading up
• Map direction • Change map direction
• Mark this point • Mark
While in navigation POI mode, the following commands are available by
voice activation:
• Automobile club • AAA (Triple A)
• Auto service & maintenance • Auto service
• Gas station • Gas
• Parking garage • Parking lot
• ATM • Bank
• City hall • Civic center
• Community center • Convention center
• Exhibition center • Court house
• Higher education • University
• College • Hospital
• Library • Police station
• School • Amusement park
• Casino • Golf course
• Marina • Museum
• Park & recreation • Parks & recreation
• Performing arts • Ski resort
• Skiing • Sports complex
• Stadium • Tourist attraction
• Winery • Restaurant
• I’m hungry • American restaurant
• American food • Chinese restaurant
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
32
• Chinese food • Continental restaurant
• Continental food • French restaurant
• French food • Italian restaurant
• Italian food • Japanese restaurant
• Japanese food • Mexican restaurant
• Mexican food • Seafood restaurant
• Seafood • Other restaurant
• Other food • Shopping
• Shopping mall • Grocery store
• Airport • Bus station
• Ferry terminal • Historical monument
• Hotel • Park and ride
• Rental car agency • Rest area
• Rest stop • Tourist information
• Train station • Business facility
• City center • POI off
• Commuter rail station
While in navigation destination (DEST) mode, the following commands
are available:
• Home • Go home
• Previous starting point • Go starting point
• Next way point map • First way point map
• Second way point map • Third way point map
• Fourth way point map • Fifth way point map
• Destination map • Delete destination
• Cancel destination
While in navigation guidance mode, the following commands are available
by voice activation:
• Repeat guidance • Repeat voice
• Louder • Softer
• Voice guidance off • Voice guidance on
• Open guidance screen • Close guidance screen
• Arrow guidance • Arrow guide
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
33
• Change to arrow guidance • Change to arrow guide
• Turn list guidance • Turn list guide
• Change to turn list guidance • Change to turn list guide
• Entire route map • Entire route
• Route overview • Reroute
• Detour • Detour entire route
Navigation help commands you may speak at any time:
• Help • Map
• Destination • Guidance
• Radio • Disc
• Map help • Destination help
• Guidance help • Radio help
• Disc help
Audio mode
Your Lincoln Navigation Audio System has many features including a full
range of audio functions. To access these functions, press AUDIO on the
main bezel. This will take you into audio mode.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
34
Volume/power control
Press knob to turn the audio system
on/off. Turn to raise or lower
volume. The levels will be displayed
on the screen.
To activate the navigation mode,
press MAP or DEST.
To adjust the navigation voice output level, select the NAV MENU button
via the map screen.
Speed compensated volume (SCV)
With this feature, radio volume changes automatically with vehicle speed
to compensate for road and wind noise. To engage the SCV feature:
1. Press AUDIO.
2. Press SOUND.
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
35
3. SCV is located in the middle of
the screen. Press to turn on.
4. Select setting 1 to 7 or turn off.
The recommended level for the speed compensated volume is from level
1 through level 3. When activated, level 1 is the minimum setting and
level 7 is the maximum setting.
AM/FM select
The AM/FM control works in radio, CD and navigation modes.
AM/FM select in radio mode
Press AM/FM1/FM2 to switch between AM/FM1/FM2 memory preset
stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press to stop CD play and begin radio play.
AM/FM select in navigation mode
The radio will continue to play in the background of the navigation
screens. To access, press AUDIO then AM/FM1/FM2.
Seek
• Press
/ to find the next
listenable station up/down the
frequency band.
• Press
/ to advance to the
next/previous track on a CD.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
36
Tune adjust
Press TUNE to manually move
down/up (
/ ) the frequency
band.
In CD mode, press TRACK to select
the previous/next (
/ ).
Autoset memory preset
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency band using
AM/FM1/FM2.
2. Press AUTO SET.
3. When the first six strong stations
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
If there are less than six strong
stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset
controls will all store the last strong station available.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO SET again.
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
37
Scan
Press SCAN for a brief sampling of
all listenable stations and CD tracks.
Press again to disable and remain on
the current selection.
Preset scan
Press PRESET SCAN to scan the
stations stored in the memory
presets.
Radio data system (RDS) feature
This feature allows your audio
system to receive text information
from RDS-equipped FM radio
stations such as station call letters,
program type, etc. When in FM
mode, press RDS to
activate/deactivate.
Traffic function
Select TRAFFIC for traffic
information broadcast from certain
stations which will automatically
interrupt radio or CD playback at a
preset volume level.
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
38
Traffic information not available in most U.S. markets.
Information feature
Press INFO to view the frequency,
call letters and PTY category of the
selected FM station.
Note: Not all stations support INFO function.
Program type (PTY)
This feature allows you to search for Radio Data System (RDS) stations
selectively by their program type.
Ensure that the RDS function is
turned on. Press PTY to turn the
feature on/off.
To set/change PTY:
Ensure that the RDS function is
turned on.
Press SET PTY to select from the
following program types:
• All
• Classical
• Country
• Information
• Jazz
• Religious
• Rock
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
39
• Soft
• Top 40
Once PTY has been programmed, press SEEK (
/ ) or SCAN to
initiate a search up or down the frequency.
Preset scan and Autoset also initiate PTY searches. The search will stop
when the desired program type has been reached. If no program type is
found, a message will display.
Note: Not all stations support PTY information.
Sound functions
To access settings for Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade, DSP (Digital Signal
Programing), SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), and Occupancy modes:
1. Press AUDIO.
2. Press SOUND.
3. Select from Bass/Treb; Bal/Fade; DSP/SCV.
4. Press +/— to increase/decrease the levels.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
40
Bass : Allows you to increase or
decrease the audio system’s bass
output.
Treble : Allows you to raise or
lower the audio system’s treble
output.
Fade : Allows you to adjust the
amount of sound emitted from the
front and rear speakers.
Balance : Allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right
and left speakers.
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume):
Automatically compensates for road
wind and noise. Refer to Speed
compensated volume earlier in this
chapter.
DSP Occupancy mode: Use to
optimize the sound based upon the
occupants in the vehicle. Select
from ALL SEATS, REAR SEATS or
DRIVER SEAT.
Setting memory preset stations
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM1/FM2 touch controls.
2. Select a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset until the sound returns. The
frequency will appear in the preset.
CNTR
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
41
Satellite ready capability
Your Lincoln navigation system
comes equipped with Satellite ready
capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your
Lincoln dealer. Detailed Satellite
instructions are included with the
dealer installed kit.
CD mode
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
Playing a previously loaded CD:
To begin CD play (if a CD is already
loaded), press AUDIO hard button
and then CD.
SOUND
AM
FM1
FM2
CD
SEEK
TUNE
PRESET SCAN
AUTO SET
SCAN
RDS
TRAFFIC
INFO PTY
SET PTY
87.9
89.9
98.1
98.5
106.3 107.9
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
42
Press CD. CD play will begin where
it stopped last.
Loading a CD:
1. Press CD OPEN CLOSE on the bezel.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
43
2. The navigation screen will fold down, allowing you access to the
in-dash six CD system.
3. Press LOAD and the desired CD slot number. The indicator light will
blink slowly at first, then quickly, signaling the system is ready.
4. Insert a disc.
5. To load more than one disc, press and hold LOAD. This will initiate
autoload and will allow you to load all open CD slots.
After an allotted time, the screen will close automatically or you may
press CD OPEN CLOSE on the bezel again.
6. Once the screen closes, the system will start playing the last CD
loaded.
Track
Press
/ to advance to the
next/previous track.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
44
Rewind/fast forward in CD mode
Press to reverse or advance
(
/ ) in the current CD track.
Scan feature in CD mode
Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling
of all tracks on the current CD.
Press again to disengage and remain
with the current track.
Shuffle feature in CD mode
When in CD (or CDDJ mode), press
SHUFFLE to engage the shuffle
feature. Press to select from
shuffling between tracks (SHUFFLE
TRACK) on the current CD or
between all tracks on all CDs
(SHUFFLE DISC). All tracks will be
played in random order. Press again
to disengage (SHUFFLE OFF).
Compression feature
The compression feature works in
CD mode and boosts more quiet
music and lowers louder music to
minimize the need for volume
adjustments.
When in CD or CDDJ mode, press COMPRESS to engage or disengage
the compression feature.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
45
Pause
In CD mode, press PAUSE to pause
the current track. Press again to
continue playing.
Map mode
Map display information
To access the map display, press MAP on the bezel.
Once pressed, the current map
display will appear on the screen
showing the current vehicle
location.
Zoom control
When ’Zoom’ is pressed, the scale indicator is shown on the screen. The
scale markings are: 1/32, 1/16,1/4, 1/8, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
miles. The control can be used in a number of ways:
• Touch and hold one of the arrow buttons for the map to be displayed
again at each zoom level.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
46
• Touch one of the arrow buttons repeatedly for the map to be
displayed again at the final zoom level.
• Touch one of the segments of the scale indicator for the map to be
displayed at the selected zoom level.
Additional map function buttons
To initiate the display of additional
map function buttons, tap the map
anywhere on the screen or press the
MAP hard key. These additional
features will disappear from the
screen within five seconds unless
pressed.
• STORE - stores current vehicle location as a memory point. Refer to
Memory Points for further information.
• POI (Point of Interest)- brings up the Quick POI menu which allows
the user to perform two functions:
Display POI icons on the map for one category.
Select local map area POIs as destinations or waypoints. The list of
local area POIs can be sorted by distance, name, or icon. Refer to
Points of Interest for further information.
If home has been previously programmed in the “Nav Menu”, the home
icon (house) will appear on the screen and is able to be selected as a
destination.
To delete POI icons from the map, touch the map again and press the
POI off button.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
47
Route preferences
After entering a destination, the
Route preferences will appear on
the screen showing what is
currently selected. You may choose
to activate/deactivate selections
which the system will factor in when
calculating your route. Those
options are:
• Minimize Time/Distance
• Use Major Roads
• Use Toll Roads
• Use Ferries
Information function
INFO will appear on the screen
when you have calculated a
destination. Press INFO for more
information about the current
destination, if available.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
48
You will be able to view the
information (if available) as well as
choose to store the destination as a
memory point by pressing OK.
Screen symbols
Navigation symbol — Indicates
the current vehicle position and
points to the direction in which the
vehicle is currently traveling.
Destination symbol — Indicates
the current route destination.
Next turn symbol — Shows the
next maneuver that will need to be
taken on the current route.
North up button — Indicates that
the map is displayed with north to
the top of the screen. Press to
toggle between “North up” and
“Heading up” map display states.
Heading up button — Indicates
that the map is displayed with the
vehicle heading to the top of the
screen. The position of the pointer
indicates the direction of north on
the map. Press to toggle between “North up” and “Heading up” map
display states.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
49
Avoid areas or points — The “X”
symbol indicates a point. to be
avoided in route calculations.
If the avoid point is enlarged to an
avoid area, it will appear on the
screen as a shaded box.
Way point symbol — Indicates the
location of a way point (locations
you wish to visit in route to your
ultimate destination) on the map.
Home position symbol —
Indicates the location on the map,
currently stored as the home
position.
Stored location symbol —
Indicates the location of a memory
point. This is the default symbol
used when the point is stored. (If
desired, an icon of your own choice can be selected from the 15 icons
available.) Refer to Choosing from the icon list.
GPS symbol— Indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals are
being received for accurate map
positioning. The symbol is not
displayed under normal operation.
Speaker icon symbol— Press to
turn voice guidance on/off.
Navigation menu
To access the Navigation Menu,
press NAV MENU at the bottom of
the map screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
50
Once pressed, the Navigation Menu
will display showing the following
options:
• Route Options/Preferences
• Navigation Set Up
• Display Options
• Stored Locations
• On Route Scroll
• Voice Guidance/Volume
Depending upon whether or not a route is active will determine if route
options/route preferences is contained on the Navigation Menu.
Route options (destination entered)
Once in navigation mode and a
route is currently active, press
“Chng. route” to access the ROUTE
OPTIONS screen. Choose from the
following selections:
• Detour: Press to select a detour
around the current route. Refer
to Detour options later in this
chapter for further information.
• Route Preferences: When
creating a destination, select from: Minimize Time/Distance, Use Major
Roads, Use Toll Roads, Use Ferries.
• Display Whole Route: Will enter MAP mode and display your entire
chosen route.
Note: Route preference appears on the Nav menu when no destination
is entered.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
51
While driving under route guidance, only follow an instruction
when it is safe to do so as the system cannot be aware of
changing conditions. Use voice guidance as much as possible, and only
view the display when driving conditions permit.
Ensure that you follow highway code restrictions and do not
take any risks. For example, if you are unable to make a U-turn,
continue on your journey. The navigation system will recalculate your
route to get you back to an appropriate road to your destination.
Navigation set up
The Navigation Set up screen will
allow you to make adjustments to
the navigation displays.
Average speed settings
Allows you to set approximate
speeds you drive. These speeds
enable the navigation system to aid
in calculating timing for routes.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
52
Quick POI (Point of Interest)
Allows you to change the Quick POI
menu settings. Select the desired
Quick POI (Gas, ATM, etc.) and
then press ’List Categories’ for
further categories, or ’Map Area
POIs’ to show the desired POIs on
your current map.
Restore system defaults
Resets all system user-selectable
options to the default (automatic)
values (i.e. guidance, voice, search
area and route preferences).
Calibration
This feature is helpful if the car has
been towed, or if you notice it is not
registering at the correct vehicle
location on the map.
Press “Position” to reposition the
vehicle location. Press the screen to
scroll the map to the desired
location and press OK to confirm.
Press “Distance” to calibrate by
distance and improve the navigation
accuracy. It is recommended to
activate this function after every tire replacement. When the button is
highlighted, calibration is in process and will turn off automatically when
complete.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
53
DVD map version
Displays the version of the inserted
navigation DVD. Refer to Ordering
additional map DVDs for further
information.
Display Options
The Display Options screen will
allow you make adjustments to the
navigation display screen. You can
choose from:
• Map Mode (Dual or Full)
• Guidance Mode (Arrows or Turn
list)
• Guidance Display (On or Off)
• Time to destination (Show or
Hide)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
54
Stored locations
The Stored locations screen will
allow you to choose from
destinations that have been saved
into the navigation system.
In this screen, you can select from
Memory Points, Special Memory
Points, Home, Avoid Area,
Destination and Way Point, or
Previous Destination. Please refer to
the Destination menu section for a
complete description of the
functions.
On route scroll
The system automatically scrolls
through the entire planned
navigation route either forwards or
backwards. To activate, press the
arrow buttons at the bottom left of
the map screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
55
Voice guidance/volume
Allows you to turn the voice guidance option on/off and to determine the
volume level of the guidance voice prompts. To adjust:
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav Menu” at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.
3. Press the speaker icon to turn the
voice guidance option on/off. Press
the desired number to select the
volume level for the voice prompts.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
56
Home
To set home for the first time:
1. Press MAP.
2. Press “Nav. Menu”.
3. Press “Stored Locations”.
4. Press “Home”.
5. Press “Add”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
57
6. Select the desired menu item you
wish to set as Home (Address,
Memory Point, Point of Interest,
Previous Destination).
7. Enter the required details.
8. Press OK to set the home
position.
To view home, press the home icon
(house) on the Destination Entry
screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
58
To view the set home position
1. Press MAP.
2. Press “Nav. Menu”.
3. Press “Stored Locations”.
4. Press “Home”.
5. Press “List”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
59
Deleting a home location
1. Press MAP.
2. Press “Nav. Menu”.
3. Press “Stored Locations”.
4. Press “Home”.
5. Press “Delete”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
60
6. Press YES to confirm.
Special memory points
There are five possible special
memory points that you can set.
To set a memory point:
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav. Menu”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
61
3. Press “Stored Locations”.
4. Press “Special Memory”.
5. Press “Add” and select a position.
6. Select point 1–5.
7. Input a destination.
8. Press OK.
Once all five special memory points are entered, the “Add” control will
read as “Full”. You must delete points before more can be added.
To delete a memory point:
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav. Menu”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
62
3. Press “Stored Locations”.
4. Press “Special Memory”.
5. Press “Delete”. The list will
display.
6. Select the special memory point
to delete.
7. Press “Del. all” to delete all
entered special memory points.
8. Press “Yes” to confirm.
Detour options
You may engage the detour option once a route has already been
calculated by the system. To access the detour option:
1. Press the MAP hard key
2. Press “Chg. Route”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
63
Press DETOUR to activate. Use the
soft controls to select and enter the
number of miles you want to deviate
off of the current road.
Press DETOUR to confirm the
selection and to activate the detour
around the specified areas.
Press NEW ROUTE if you would
like the system to plan a different
route. The system may calculate an
entirely new route, depending on
what is available.
Route interruptions
In the course of your destination, you may decide to temporarily leave
your planned route for gas, food, etc. If you turn off the ignition, the
option to continue the route guidance will be displayed when the ignition
is turned on again. The route can be accessed once again after you press
“Agree” on the warning screen.
Route alterations or cancellations
To cancel or change your current
route from the map, press DEST.
You may then select from Detour,
Display whole route, Route
preferences, Destination Entry,
Calculate or Cancel Guidance.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
64
Avoiding an area while under guidance
For one reason or another, you may
choose to avoid a certain area while
in route to your destination. To
select the area to avoid:
• From the MAP screen, press Nav
Menu.
• Select Route Options, then
Display Whole Route
• Press Turn List
• Press Avoid next to the street to be avoided
• Choose OK to confirm
• Press Reroute to activate
The new area is added to the list of stored avoid areas.
Note: In some circumstances, it may not be possible to avoid all selected
areas.
Listing areas to avoid
You can list all areas noted as
“avoid”.
• Press “Nav Menu”.
• Press “Stored locations”.
• Press “Avoid area”.
• Press LIST to view all previously
stored selections.
• Select the desired one. The map
screen will be displayed, showing
the location and address of the selected area.
Press Enlarge or Reduce to adjust the size of the visible area. Scroll the
map as required.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
65
Deleting areas to avoid
To delete a selection from the
“Avoid area” list:
• From the stored locations menu,
select “Avoid area”.
• Press DELETE
• Select the desired area to be
deleted.
• Press DEL. ALL to delete all
stored areas.
• Press YES to confirm.
Destination menu
Press DEST on the main bezel to access the navigation mode.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
66
Initial map display
After pressing AGREE to the initial
WARNING screen, you will move
into the initial map screen which
shows the current vehicle location.
Pressing the globe icon will take you
to the user settings — audible
feedback, navigation units, language
and clock (if equipped).
Note: There may be a slight time
delay between the soft key and the
hard key functions.
Destination entry
Search area
The mapped areas covered by your
map DVD are reflected in the
Search Area map that is displayed
on the Destination Entry screen.
Your navigation system uses a
regional search area. This area is
the area from which navigational
directions will be used.
To check your area or reset, press
CHANGE under the search area
listing. The map will open and allow
you to select another regional area.
Ensure that your search area is
correct prior to setting your
destination.
Cancel
IL , IN , KY , MI , OH , WI
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
67
Selecting a destination
Press DEST to set a destination.
From this menu, you may select
from the following options:
• Address— Use to select a
destination based on a known
street address.
• Point of Interest— Use to
select a destination that is a point
of interest location (i.e., airport,
restaurant, hospital).
• Previous Destination — Use to select a destination from among the
last 20 entered destinations
• Emergency — Use to select the Emergency screen which will give
you the location of the closest Hospital, Police Station and Dealer.
Press
’Next Page’ to access
more selections:
• Memory point — Use to select
from a memory point.
• Freeway exit/entrance — Use
to select a certain freeway exit or
entrance.
• Select from map —Use to select
a place on the map.
• Special Memory Points — Use to select a destination from
previously stored entries.
Address
1. From the destination entry
screen, select “Address”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
68
2. Input the house/building number
and press OK.
3. Use the keyboard to type in the
street name. When you are typing
the street name, the system may
bring up possible roads that you can
select from. Use the arrows to scroll
up or down to select the desired
street.
4. Once the address is entered, the
system will pull up some possible
city and state matches. If one of
those is correct, select it. If not, you
may press either “5 near cities” for
another listing of five possible cities
and states (if available). Or, press
“Input City Name”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
69
5. You may use the keyboard to
input the desired city.
Points of interest (POI)
Select “Point of Interest” from the
Destination Entry Menu. In this next
menu, you will have the following
options:
• By Name— Enter POI name on
the keyboard. Touch “List” to
display the list of matching points
of interest. If there are too many
matches being listed, try entering
the town name first.
• By Category — Press “Category”. Scroll down the list to select the
category, then sub-category desired. Once you have selected a
category, your entry of the POI will be restricted to that category.
Previous destination
Press “Previous Destination” on the
Destination Entry Menu.
1. Select (touch) the desired item
from the list of destinations
previously reached. The item details
will be listed.
2. Confirm destination details.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
70
Deleting stored locations
Your navigation system allows you to delete any stored locations
(previous destinations, memory points, special memory points, home,
avoid areas, destination and way points, etc.) To delete any of these
stored locations:
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav Menu” in the bottom
left hand corner of the screen.
3. Press “Stored locations”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
71
4. Select the desired item you wish
to delete (previous destination,
memory point, etc.).
5. Press “Delete” at the bottom of
the screen.
6. The list of stored locations will be
displayed.
7. Select (touch) the entry to be
deleted. The item details will be
listed.
8. Press YES to confirm the
deletion.
9. Press DELETE ALL to delete all
stored locations.
Emergency
Your navigation system is equipped
with a separate Emergency screen.
To access the Emergency screen,
press “Emergency”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
72
This screen will list the closest
police station, hospital and dealer to
your current location.
Memory point
Your navigation system allows you to go to special destinations you may
wish to again visit. To view any of these “memory points” without a route
calculated:
1. Press the DEST hard control.
2. Press “
Next page” on the
Destination Entry screen.
3. Select “Memory Point”.
4. Select the desired item.
5. Confirm the details.
6. Press “Destination” to calculate a
route to that memory point.
Note: The list can be sorted by date, name or icon by pressing the
appropriate button.
Adding a memory point
You may add more memory points to be stored in the system.
1. With the map displayed, touch your finger to the screen to scroll to
the desired location. When you reach the desired location, remove your
finger from the screen and the map will stop scrolling. STORE will
appear on the screen.
2. Press STORE to add the location to the memory point list.
You may also add a memory point via the Navigation menu.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
73
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav Menu” in the bottom
left hand corner of the screen.
3. Press “Stored locations”.
4. Select “Memory Point”.
5. Press “Add” at the bottom of the
screen.
6. Select the desired menu item.
7. Enter/select any required details.
The new point will be added to the
stored list of memory points.
8. Press OK. The new point will be
added to the list of stored memory
points.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
74
To give the new memory point a name:
1. Select it from the list.
2. Press NAME.
3. Enter the desired name.
Accessing memory point lists
1. Press the MAP hard key.
2. Press “Nav Menu” in the bottom left hand corner of the screen.
3. Press “Stored locations”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
75
4. Press “Memory Point”.
5. Press LIST
6. Select the desired entry to view
its location details.
Sorting memory point lists
1. Access the desired list.
2. Press the button to sort the list
as desired (i.e. date, name, or icon).
When sorted by distance, the points
are ordered by distance from the
current vehicle location. When
sorting by icon, the icons are listed
in the order they appear on the icon
selection screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
76
Choosing from the icon list
After selecting a location, press
ICON to edit. There will be 15
normal and three sound icons
displayed. Press the icon you wish
to use.
The normal icons will be displayed
on the map to indicate the map
location identified with that icon.
The audible icon will sound a
distinctive chime when the vehicle
is approaching the memory point
associated with that icon.
Deleting a memory point
• In the Memory Point Menu, press
DELETE.
• Select the entry to be deleted.
• The system will ask you to
confirm deletion. Press YES to
confirm.
The screen will briefly show
“Memory Point Deleted”.
Deleting all memory points
• In the Memory Point Menu, press
DELETE ALL.
• The system will ask you to confirm deletion. Press YES to confirm.
The screen will briefly show “All Memory Points Deleted”.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
77
Freeway Entrance/Exit
To set a freeway entrance or exit as a destination:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Press “
Next page” to access
the second page of the Destination
Entry menu.
3. Select “Freeway Entrance/Exit”.
1. Enter freeway name— Enter
the freeway name using the
keyboard. Press “List” to select a
freeway from those displayed.
To enter numbers in the freeway
name, press “Sym”.
2. Select entrance/exit— Press
“Entrance” if you wish to join the
freeway at this junction. Press
“Exit” if you wish to leave the
freeway at this junction.
3. Select Junction— The screen
will display a list of junctions on the
freeway. They can be listed either
by distance, (from the current
vehicle location), by pressing the
“Dist” button or alphabetically by
pressing the “A-Z” button. Select the desired entrance or exit.
The destination details are displayed for confirmation.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
78
Destination and way points
The Store Dest. & Way Point menu
is used after a destination or way
point has been entered for the first
time using the Destination Entry
menu. You can store and delete
destinations and way points
(locations you wish to visit in route
to your ultimate destination). You
can also select the order in which
you visit them.
Adding (storing) a destination or way point
• Once a destination is entered,
press ADD to store the location.
The Store Dest. & Way Point
menu is displayed.
• Select whether you want to store
an Address, Point of Interest or
Previous Destination.
• Enter the necessary details for
the selection.
• If a destination was entered, it
will be stored as the current location. If a way point was entered, it
will be added to the list of way points.
Listing destinations and way points
Press LIST to display the stored way
points and destination (if entered).
The first way point to be visited is
at the bottom of the list and the
destination is at the top.
You may view the map location of
any entry. On the map, location
details for the entry are displayed at
the top of the screen.
To adjust the position of the way point (or destination), scroll the map
as required.
Press OK.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
79
Editing and changing order of way points and destination
Press “Chg. Order” to change the
order in which the way points are
visited. The points are listed
chronologically from bottom up, the
destination being on the top.
Press the MAP button to edit the
way point location on the map
display.
Press OK to confirm.
Deleting way points and destination
After pressing DELETE, the list of
way points and the destination (if
entered) is displayed, showing the
’Delete Dest. &Way Pt.’ menu.
Select the entry to be deleted. Press
YES to confirm.
Press DELETE ALL to delete all
way points. Press YES to confirm.
Selecting route criteria
Once you have selected a
destination, you may change the
routing criteria by pressing
“Change” in the route preferences
screen. Refer to Route preferences
for further information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
80
Route calculation
Once the route criteria is selected,
the navigation system automatically
calculates the selected destination.
The route appears on the display
screen and a voice prompt provides
instructions.
The system may calculate up to four
routes for the desired destination.
Press “Next” to scroll through the
various planned routes. Press “Start”
to confirm the route selection and
begin route guidance.
Next route
Your navigation system may map
more than one route to the same
destination. After the destination
has been calculated, it will appear
on the map screen. Press NEXT in
the upper right hand corner to scroll
through other possible routes to the
same destination.
Menu mode
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
81
To access menu mode, press the MENU hard control.
Menu mode allows you to access:
• System Set-up
• Information — Gives you the
Lincoln Customer Assistance
Center information.
• Brightness/Contrast — Allows you
to adjust the brightness and
contrast on the screen.
• Screen off — Allows you to turn
off the navigation screen.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
82
System setup
The system set up menu contains the following user settings:
• Audible Feedback — Press to
activate audible voice navigation
commands. Press again to
deactivate.
• Navigation Units — Press to
toggle between Metric/English
units.
• Language — Press to toggle
between English, French, or
Spanish.
General information
Safety information
Please read and follow all stated safety precautions. Failure to do
so may increase your risk of collision and personal injury. Ford
Motor Company shall not be liable for any damages of any type
arising from failure to follow these guidelines.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the system. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The driver must not attempt to operate any detailed operation of
the navigation system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full
attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park in a
safe place before performing detailed operations.
If the system is used for an extended period of time with the
vehicle stationary, ensure that the engine is running to avoid
draining the battery.
Do not apply pressure to the display screen.
The navigation system is not a substitute for your personal judgement.
Route suggestions should not supersede local traffic regulations or safe
driving practices.
Do not follow route suggestions if they direct you to perform an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, would place you in an unsafe situation, or would
route you into an area that you consider unsafe.
Drivers should not rely on screen displays while their vehicle is in
motion. Let the voice guide you. If viewing is necessary, pull off the road
to a safe location.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
83
Do not use the navigation system to locate emergency services.
For road safety reasons, the driver should program the system only when
the vehicle is stationary. Certain functions will therefore not operate
while the vehicle is in motion.
The map database DVD does not reflect road detours, closures or
construction, road characteristics such as rough road surface, slope or
grade, weight or height restrictions, traffic congestion, weather or similar
conditions.
To use the system as effectively and safely as possible, obtain an
up-to-date map database DVD whenever they become available.
Set the volume level so that you can hear directions clearly.
Do not disassemble or modify the system as this may lead to damage and
void your warranty. If a problem occurs, stop using the system
immediately and contact your Ford or Lincoln Dealer.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The database reflects reality as existing before you received the
database and it comprises data and information from government
and other sources, which may contain errors and omissions.
Accordingly, the database may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
and due to the nature of the sources used. The database does not
include or reflect information on neighborhood safety, law
enforcement, emergency assistance, construction work, road or
lane closures, vehicle or speed restrictions, road slope or grade,
bridge height, weight or other limits, road or traffic conditions,
special events, traffic congestion, or travel time.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
84
Radio reception factors
There are certain factors that may effect your radio reception.
• Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their
strength/volume relative to other stations.
• Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal.
• Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station
frequency is displayed.
Principles of GPS (global positioning system) operation
Your system directs you based on information derived from global
positioning satellites, road maps stored on the DVD, sensors in your vehicle
and the desired destination. The system compiles all necessary information
to guide you to your selected destination. Space satellites determine the
vehicle’s current location and transmit position and time signals to your car.
If the vehicle has been parked for a long period of time, the navigation
function may be temporarily unresponsive. The navigation system will
operate reliably again once GPS reception is available for a few minutes.
Limited GPS reception
System performance may be adversely affected if GPS reception is
interrupted or interference occurs over a distance of several miles. The
following are possible causes for GPS reception being interrupted. If the
vehicle is:
• in multi-story parking garages
• in tunnels and under bridges
• inside or in between buildings
• by forests or tree-lined avenues
• in heavy rain showers and thunderstorms
• in valleys and in mountainous regions
• roads under cliffs
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
85
Ensure that you do not have any metal objects on the rear parcel shelf.
If your windows are tinted, ensure that you use non-metal tinting instead
of metal oxide tinting. Both of these factors can interrupt GPS reception.
Cleaning the display
Do not spray cleaning fluid directly onto the unit. Instead, spray onto a
soft cloth and gently wipe the unit. Only recommended products should
be used.
• Recommended products- Rubbing alcohol based cleaner (i.e., methyl
alcohol) or a damp clean cloth.
• Not harmful but not recommended- ammonia cleaner, neutral
detergent.
• Harmful to system and not recommended- acid cleaner, alkali cleaner,
benzene cleaner.
Do not clean any part of the system with benzene, paint thinner or any
other solvent.
Do not spill liquids of any kind onto the unit.
Loading the map DVD
• Your navigation DVD unit is located in the trunk (mounted under the
rear window or in a left side compartment with access door).
• Ensure that the vehicle ignition is ON.
• If a DVD is already loaded in the Navigation unit, push the eject
button.
• Load the DVD with the printed side up. Do not allow moisture or
foreign objects to enter the slot.
The navigation system utilizes a database stored in a special format on a
DVD. It is recommended always to use the latest update of this map
DVD.
• The navigation system will only work with DVDs specifically intended
for your navigation system.
• Always store the map DVDs in their protective cases when not in use.
Ordering additional map DVDs
If you wish to order a replacement or additional map, please call
1–888–NAV-MAPS (1–888–628–6277) or to log onto www.navtech.com.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
86
Latest map DVDs
The map content is constantly changing due to new roads, traffic
restrictions, etc. . Therefore, it is not always possible to exactly match
the DVD map with the current roadways. For best results, always use the
latest version of the map DVD. Map information is regularly updated, but
all areas are not necessarily covered to the same level of detail. Some
areas, in particular private roads, may not be included on the database.
To help with accuracy, always use the latest DVD version for navigation.
Customer service
If you need help operating your navigation/audio system, want to report
a map database error or want to obtain a map DVD, please call 1 (888)
628–6277 (NAV-MAPS) or log onto www.navtech.com.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
87
DUAL ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(DEATC) SYSTEM
1. A/C control: Cools the vehicle
and is used to reduce humidity in
the vehicle. Press to turn on/off.
2. Recirculation control: Cools
the vehicle more quickly by
recirculating the cabin air instead of
using outside air and helps prevent unpleasant outside odors or fumes
from entering the vehicle. Press to turn on/off in all modes except
.
3. Passenger side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the passenger side of the vehicle
when in dual zone mode. To enter
dual zone, press the passenger temperature control or DUAL. The
passenger temperature will appear in the display.
4. Rear defrost control: Removes
ice and fog from the rear window.
Press to turn on/off.
5. DUAL (Single/dual temperature
control): Allows the driver to have
full control of the cabin temperature
settings (single zone) or allows the passenger to have control of their
individual temperature settings (dual zone). Press to turn on dual zone
mode, press again to return to single zone.
A/C
R
DUAL
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
88
6. : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and the
side window demisters.
7.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, the side
window demisters and floor vents.
8.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
9.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
10.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Manual override controls: Allows
you to manually determine where
airflow is directed. To return to fully
automatic control, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and
the fan will not operate.
12. AUTO: Press and select the
desired temperature. The system
will automatically determine the fan
speed, airflow location, outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the
vehicle to the selected temperature. If unusual conditions exist, (i.e.,
window fogging, etc.), manual overrides allow you to select airflow
locations and fan speed.
13. Driver’s side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle.
14. Fan Speed: Used to manually
enable or disable the fan speed.
15. EXT: Displays the outside air
temperature. It will remain
displayed until the EXT control is
pressed again. The external
temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle has been moving for
a period of time.
OFF
OFF
AUTO
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
89
16. Temperature conversion:
Press to toggle between Fahrenheit
and Celsius temperature on the
DEATC display only. The set point
temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half-degree increments.
OPERATING TIPS
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
recirculation control on or the system turned off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
90
REAR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
• TEMP: Press to increase or
decrease airflow temperature.
• FAN: Press to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel.
Press the rear defroster control to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. A small LED will illuminate
when the rear defroster is activated.
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of
time or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually
turn off the defroster, press the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
R
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
91
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a preselected period of
time after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
The autolamps are turned on at
night or when the front wipers are
turned on.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise. The
preselected time lapse is adjustable up to approximately three
minutes. See the programming procedure following.
•
To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to the off position (O).
The amount of time the autolamps stay on can be programed by doing
the following:
1. Turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn the headlamp switch to the Autolamp position.
3. Turn the headlamp switch to OFF.
4. Turn the ignition to RUN and then back to OFF.
5. Turn the headlamp switch to the Autolamp position.
6. Wait the desired amount of time for delay, then turn the headlamp
switch to OFF.
7. Steps 3 through 5 need to be performed within 10 seconds.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
Lights
92
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
The daytime running light system turns the headlamps on, with a
reduced light output, when:
• the ignition is in RUN,
• the transmission is not in P (Park),
• the high beams are not in the flash to pass position and
• the headlamp system is not turned on by another feature such as
using the headlamp control or Autolamp.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
93
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlight
and parklamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument
panel.
During full daylight, the instrument panel will still be visible with the
headlamps operating.
Domelamp Control
The panel dimmer control also controls the domelamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right, past detent to activate the
domelamp.
• In order to turn off the domelamp, rotate the thumbwheel to the left.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) Twenty five feet
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and
mark a 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
94
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted.
To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block
the light from one headlamp while
adjusting the other.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Usinga4mm
wrench, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
95
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map/Courtesy lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
map lamp control.
Rear courtesy/reading lamps
The courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
With the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position, the reading lamp can
be turned on by pressing the rocker
control.
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the following chart. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
96
Function Trade Number
Headlamp (HI beam) 9005
Headlamp (LOW beam)* H7
Park and turn lamp (front) 3457 AK
Sidemarker (front) 168
Backup lamp 3156 K
Stop, tail, turn and sidemarker lamp (rear) 3157 K
Cornering lamp 3156 K
License plate lamp 168
High-mount brakelamp - Stop** 20 (LEDS)
Luggage compartment lamp 212-2
Map lamp 906
Visor vanity lamp 7065
Door courtesy lamp 904
Glove compartment 194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
* For vehicles with HID lamps, see your dealer for service.
**When replacing the center high mount stop lamp, see your dealer for
replacement bulbs.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
97
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position.
2. Remove the protective bulb cover
by loosening and removing the five
screws.
3. Rotate the light bulb socket
counter clockwise and pull it
straight out from the assembly.
4. Remove the old bulb from the
lamp assembly by pulling it straight
out of the bulb socket.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
5. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Note: To ensure a good seal, attach the bulb cap and partially tighten
the screws. Check to ensure the gasket is fully centered. Finish
tightening the screws in a criss-cross pattern (upper-left, lower right
etc.)
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
dealer or a qualified technician.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/ sidemarker bulbs
The park/turn lamp bulbs can be replaced with out removing the
headlamp assembly.
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the protective bulb cover by removing the three retaining
bolts.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
98
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
the socket and push in the new bulb
until it snaps, locking it into
position.
5. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing tail lamp/brake/turn lamp bulbs
The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are located
in the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the trunk
and carefully pull the carpet away to
expose the plastic retainer.
2. Remove plastic retainer to expose
the lamp assembly hardware.
3. Remove three nut and washer
assemblies and the lamp assembly
from the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly by rotating it
clockwise.
7. Install the lamp assembly on the
vehicle with three nut and washer
assemblies ensuring the washers on the nuts are flush with the body to
prevent water from entering the trunk.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
99
8. Install the plastic retainer and carefully push the carpet back into
place.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then remove two
screws, grommets and the license
plate lamp assembly from the trunk
lid.
2. Carefully pull the bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
3. Install the lamp assembly on
trunk lid with two grommets,
ensuring the grommets are pushed
all the way in to the trunk lid and secure with two screws.
Replacing backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open trunk and
remove bulb socket from the trunk
lid by turning counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
3. Install the bulb socket in trunk lid
by turning clockwise.
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
To change the high-mount brake
lamp assembly:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then pry the light
assembly away from its housing to
disengage it from the retaining clips.
2. Remove the light assembly from
the headliner.
3. Disconnect the light assembly wiring and replace the light assembly.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
100
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Windshield wiper/washer features
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, Headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on.
The lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the wipers are turned off.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
Driver Controls
101
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
3. Replace wiper blades every 6
months for optimum performance.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
102
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. Some of the features in the overhead console
include Compass, Homelink, Oil minder and Park assist deactivation.
Normal mode
There are three normal modes; Compass, Oil Minder and Off. To select
one of these:
1. From a blank display (OFF),
press and release the MODE button
once to enter the compass mode.
2. Press and release the MODE
button again to enter the oil minder
mode.
3. Press and release the MODE
button again to return to OFF.
Warning mode
A system warning will display for oil minder, park assist and alarm
system related warnings. A higher priority active warning message will
overwrite the lower message. Press the RESET button to acknowledge
the warning, the warning message is cleared and a normal mode message
or another warning message will be displayed.
• The park assist de-activation cannot be cleared by the RESET button
and will remain displayed until the system is reactivated.
• The oil minder has a two-level warning. The first level messages
disappear from the display when the RESET button is pressed. The
second level messages return on the display after a period of time.
• The alarm system warning will be displayed when you first start the
vehicle and can be cleared by pressing the RESET button.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
103
Compass mode
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
1. Turn ignition to the ON position.
2. Start the engine.
3. From a blank display press and
release the MODE button once. The
directional heading will be
displayed.
Note: If the compass is
de-calibrated, CAL will be displayed
in the right corner of the display.
Refer to “Calibration mode” in this
section for more details.
4. The overhead console displays the compass heading in one of eight
directions: NORTH, NORTHEAST, EAST, SOUTHEAST, SOUTH,
SOUTHWEST, WEST, and NORTHWEST.
Zone variation mode
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. A correct zone
setting will eliminate compass heading error.
To set the compass zone:
1. Press and release the MODE
button until the compass directional
heading is displayed.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
104
2. Hold down the MODE button for
5 seconds to enter zone mode. The
display will read PRESS RESET TO
SET ZONE XX where XX is the
current zone.
3. Release the MODE button.
4. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in by referring to the zone
map.
5. Repeatedly press and release the
RESET button to scroll through the
zones 1–15 until the desired zone is
displayed.
6. Press the MODE button to save
the new zone setting and return to
the compass normal mode.
Note: The compass exits the zone
setting mode and returns to its previous setting after one minute of no
activity.
Note: If power is interrupted during the zone setting process, the
compass resets to the same zone it was set to before the zone change
process was started.
Calibration mode
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Press and release the MODE
button until the compass directional
heading is displayed.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
105
2. Hold down the MODE button for
10 seconds to enter the calibration
mode. The display will read PRESS
RESET TO DECAL.
3. Release the MODE button.
4. Press the RESET button to
de-calibrate the compass. The
display will read CIRCLE SLOWLY
TO CALIBRATE for a few seconds
and then display a direction with
CAL displayed on the right side.
5. Drive the vehicle in a tight circle
in a magnetically clean area such as
an open parking lot.
6. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]). This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
7. The correct compass heading will be displayed when the compass is
calibrated.
Note: If the RESET button is not pressed, the compass will exit
calibration mode after three minutes of no activity and the original
calibration data will be restored.
Note: If power is interrupted during the calibration process, the compass
resets to the original calibration data from before the calibration process
started.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
106
HomeLink姞 mode (if equipped)
Train mode
Note: Do not train the HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
To train a HomeLink威 button to control a specific device:
1. Select the HomeLink威 button to
train.
2. Press and continuously hold the
button for 20 seconds. CHANNEL X
TRANSMIT will be displayed (X will
be 1, 2, or 3) during this time.
Note: If more than one button is
pressed, priority will be given to the
lowest numbered channel.
3. After 20 seconds, the display will
read CHANNEL X TRAINING to
indicate training has started.
Continue to hold the button.
Note: If the channel being trained
has not been previously trained, the
channel will immediately enter the
training mode (no 20 second delay).
4. Point the original garage door
opener/transmitter at the overhead
console. Hold down the original transmitter’s button so the overhead
console can learn the transmitter’s frequency and data stream.
5. Training will be complete in 100
seconds or less. CHANNEL X
TRAINED will be displayed when
training is complete.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
107
6. DID NOT TRAIN will be displayed
if the channel did not properly train.
7. Release the channel X button.
Training is complete.
Note: Additional training may be
required for rolling code equipped
devices. Refer to the Rolling code
programming in this section.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing
the “Train mode” in this section. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker & easier)
1. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on the garage door motor
head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating the “learn” or “smart” button refer to
the device’s owner manual or contact HomeLink威 at 1–800–355–3515 or
on the Internet at www.homelink.com.
2. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button on the garage door
motor head unit.
Note: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3.
3. Press and release the
programmed HomeLink威 button.
Press and release the HomeLink威
button a second time to complete
the training process. (Some garage
door openers may require this
procedure to be done a third time
to complete the training.)
The rolling code equipped device
should now recognize the
HomeLink威 signal and activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be
programmed if this has not previously been done. Refer to the “Train
mode” in this section.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
108
Transmit mode
1. Select the button for the desired
channel (for example, for the garage
door you wish to open).
2. Press the button. CHANNEL X
TRANSMIT is displayed.
3. The proper signal is transmitted
to the device being controlled.
4. Release the button.
Note: If more than one button is
pressed, priority will be given to the
lowest numbered channel.
Erase mode
To erase all three HomeLink威 channel codes:
1. Simultaneously press and hold
buttons 1 and 3 for 20 seconds.
2. CLEARING CHANNELS will be
displayed when the channel codes
are being erased.
3. CHANNELS CLEARED will be
displayed when the erase operation
is complete.
4. Release buttons 1 and 3.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
109
HomeLink姞 default code mode
HomeLink威 uses default codes for testing and for optional home lighting
accessories. To load the default codes:
1. Simultaneously press and hold
buttons 1 and 3. CLEARING
CHANNELS is displayed.
2. After 20 seconds CHANNELS
CLEARED is displayed. Continue to
hold the buttons.
3. After 10 more seconds,
CHANNELS DEFAULTED is
displayed when all the channel
default codes have been successfully
loaded.
Note: If you need to train the
garage door opener, refer to “Train
mode” in this section.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
110
Oil minder mode
Normal mode
To enter oil minder mode, press the
MODE button repeatedly until OIL
LIFE XX% is displayed. XX will be
6–100 when oil life is OK.
Change oil soon
The overhead console will warn the
user that it is time to change the oil
based on the number of engine
revolution counts, number of miles
driven or the calendar time since
the last “Oil Life” reset. These
values are constantly updated while
the vehicle is running. When
CHANGE OIL SOON is displayed as a warning, it will be displayed until
the RESET button is pressed and revert back to the previous mode.
Change oil now
The overhead console will warn the
user that the oil needs changing
when CHANGE OIL NOW is
displayed. This warning will remain
on until the oil life is reset in oil
minder mode (unless a higher
priority message is requested). In
any other mode, the CHANGE OIL
NOW warning can be cleared by pressing RESET button but will return
after a period of time.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
111
Reset oil life mode
To reset oil minder when the vehicle oil is changed:
1. Press the MODE button
repeatedly until one of these three
messages is displayed; OIL LIFE
XX%, CHANGE OIL SOON or
CHANGE OIL NOW.
2. Press and hold the MODE button
for 5 seconds until RESET FOR
NEW OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button
for 2 seconds. The oil life value will
be reset to 100%
Note: If the RESET button is not pressed after one minute of no activity,
the original oil life will be restored.
Note: If power is interrupted during the reset oil life mode, the overhead
console resets the oil life to the original value.
Park assist de-activation (if equipped)
Park assist can be de-activated/re-activated with the transmission in R
(reverse) by pressing the control on the overhead console. The system
will re-activate every time the ignition key is turned ON.
To de-activate park assist:
1. Press the
OFF button to
de-activate. PARK ASSIST
DISABLED will be displayed and the
button will be backlit amber.
2. Press the
OFF button again
to re-activate. The button will be
backlit green at night time when
the headlamps are ON.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
112
CLOCK
Press the right control to move the
time display foward.
Press the left control to move the
time display backwards.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT
Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigarette lighter.
Use the power point.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element.
The Maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse
rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,
a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should
supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a
blown fuse.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
The auxiliary power point is located under the instrument panel.
F
E
1
2
FILL ON
LEFT
<
SHUF
MUTE
SEL
BAL
BASS
FADE
TREB
SCAN
CD
AM/FM
SEEK
REW
FF
COMP
563412
SIDE
TUNE
TAPE
RDS
AUTO
SET
AUTO
OFF
DUAL
A/C
R
EXT
F/ C
F
F
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
113
POWER WINDOWS
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows.
• Press the top portion of the
rocker switch to close.
• Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch to open.
One touch down
• Press AUTO completely down and
release quickly. The driver’s
window will open fully. Depress
again to stop window operation.
One touch down can be deactivated
during operation by pushing down
on the top part of the driver power
window control.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches, radio, and moonroof may be
used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position or until any door is opened.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
114
MIRRORS
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror which has an
auto-dimming function (available as an option on the outside driver’s side
mirror). The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal
state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror.
When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will
automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a
bright clear view when backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the mirror since this may
impair proper mirror performance.
Without Navigation System
Press the control to turn the mirror
OFF or AUTO.
With Navigation System
The illuminated LED to the right of
the AUTO button indicates if the
mirror is in the auto-dimming
function. To turn the mirror off push
the OFF button until the LED goes
out.
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror
or R to adjust the right mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
disable the adjust function.
OFF AUTO
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
115
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the bottom of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 2.5 inches (65 mm) of
maximum travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
116
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET ACCEL control
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The message “SPEED CONTROL”
will be displayed in the message
center.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary when driving up and down a steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
ON
OFF
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
117
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES/RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The message “SPEED
CONTROL” will be displayed in the
message center. The RES/RESUME
control will not work if the vehicle
speed is not faster than 30 mph (48
km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET ACCEL
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the SET
ACCEL control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase
the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the COAST
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the
COAST control to operate the
Tap-Down function. Press and
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
118
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET ACCEL control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
Indicator light
Indicator message
This message is displayed in the
Message Center when either the
SET ACCEL or RES/RESUME
controls are pressed. It turns off when the speed control OFF is pressed,
the brake is applied or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
ON
OFF
SPEED CONTROL
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
119
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Radio control features
• Press MODE to select AM, FM1,
FM2, TAPE or CD (if equipped).
In Radio mode:
• Press NEXT to select a preset
station from memory.
In Tape mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
track on the disc.
In any mode:
• Press VOL up or down to adjust
the volume.
Climate control features
• Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature.
• Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed.
NEXT
MODE
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
120
Rear radio/climate controls
Refer to Steering Wheel Controls in this chapter for operation
instructions.
Without navigation system
With navigation system
Rear radio/climate controls lockout
The rear radio/climate control feature can be locked out by pressing the
3 and the 5 buttons on the radio simultaneously while the radio is on. To
enable the rear radio/climate controls, press the 3 and the 5 buttons
again.
For navigation radio, press audio button, press sound soft button, press
disable rear controls soft button.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
121
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
To open the moon roof:
• Press and release the control.
• For one-touch operation, press
and release the rear portion of
the control; this will fully open
the moon roof.
• To stop one-touch operation at
the desired position, press and
release the forward portion of the
control.
To close the moon roof:
• Press and hold the front portion of the control.
• To close from the vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the
control.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
ELECTRONIC MESSAGE CENTER
The electronic message center only works when the ignition is in the ON
position.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
122
The message center allows you to:
• see problems such as door ajar
and trunk ajar.
• check the on/off status of air
suspension, autolamp and speed
control systems.
• see a more accurate speed while
driving (this may not show the
same speed as your analog
speedometer).
• see how many miles/kilometers
you can drive before running out
of fuel.
• monitor the average fuel
economy.
• monitor the average speed.
• check the distance traveled during a trip on either Trip A or Trip B.
You can select different features for the message center to display by
using the message center controls located in the center of the
instrument panel.
Selectable features
Select
Each press of the SELECT control
will select a different feature as
follows:
• SPEED
• FUEL ECON
• DIST TO EMPTY
• AVG SPEED
• TRIP A/TRIP B
• E/M
For descriptions of the SELECT features, refer to “Message center
functions” later in this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
123
Reset
Press this control to reset the
selected message center function to
zero. (The only functions which can
be reset are FUEL ECON and TRIP
AorB.)
Message center functions
Speed
To use this function, select SPEED
and press the RESET control. Your
speed from that point will be
displayed on the left side of the
cluster until RESET is pressed
again.
Fuel econ (average fuel economy)
Select this function to display your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled
(kilometers traveled by liters used),
your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
Checking your highway fuel economy using the electronic
message center display
The following procedure will allow you to accurately monitor your actual
highway fuel economy. Since this procedure requires the vehicle speed
control system to be set to highway speeds, it must be run only on
suitable roadways where long distance speed control can be safely
maintained.
SELECT
RESET
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
124
You may notice gradual improvement in fuel economy over the course of
your vehicle’s break-in period (approximately 1 000 miles [1 600
kilometers]).
1. Set the speed control. Refer to Speed control in this chapter.
2. Select FUEL ECON
3. Press the RESET control to clear
the system memory.
• Actual highway fuel economy is
now displayed. This current
average measure will change as
the speed control system changes the engine speed to maintain a
constant vehicle speed. This is most noticeable in hilly environments.
4. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
5. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Dist to empty (DTE)
This function estimates
approximately how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature
to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will flash for 5
seconds and sound a tone for 1 second when you have approximately:
• 50 miles (80 km) left before you run out of fuel
• 25 miles (40 km)
• 10 miles (16 km)
SELECT
RESET
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
125
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based on
your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not the same
as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel economy is
reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected.
If “CO” or “CS” is displayed, there is a problem with the fuel indication
system and you should contact your dealer for service as soon as possible.
AVG speed
To use this function, select AVG
SPEED and press the RESET
control. Your average speed from
that point will be displayed until
RESET is pressed again.
TripAB
These two functions allow you to
see how far you have traveled since
you last reset. Trip A and Trip B are
completely independent and must
be reset individually.
To reset either trip feature to zero,
press the RESET control while the
appropriate trip distance feature (A
or B) is displayed.
E/M
When this function is displayed,
press the RESET control to change
the message center display from
metric to English units or from
English to metric units.
SELECT
RESET
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
126
POWER TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power trunk controlled by the
interior trunk control, the key fob or the keypad on the door.
If anything obstructs the power trunk while it is closing, the trunk will
automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing
trunk, or stronger. The force of the closing trunk increases as the trunk
approaches the latched position. The trunk will close with the next press
of the interior trunk control or key fob button.
Make sure all persons are clear of the luggage compartment area
before using the power trunk control.
If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is installed,
the power trunk needs to be reset. To reset the power trunk:
• Reconnect the battery with the trunk closed
• Power activate the trunk with the power interior trunk release, the
key fob or the keypad on the door to the full open position, then
power activate the same power source and fully close the trunk. The
power trunk is now reset.
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
The remote trunk release control is
located on the driver’s door trim
panel and can be operated at any
time except when your perimeter
alarm system is armed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
power trunk, press the button once
to open the trunk, press it again to
close.
You can render the switch inoperable by locking the button with your
master key.
The remote trunk release control and power door locks will be disabled
when the vehicle perimeter alarm system is armed. This control will not
work until the vehicle perimeter alarm system is disarmed. Refer to
Perimeter Alarm System in the Locks and Security chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
127
FUEL DOOR RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a
locking fuel door. To open the door,
press the control located on the
door.
Fuel filler door override release
If the remote release is inoperative,
open the trunk, then pull the
override release handle located
inside the trunk to open the fuel
filler door.
REAR CENTER CONSOLE FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear center console incorporates the following features:
• utility compartment
• auxiliary power point (if equipped)
• remote radio/climate controls (if equipped)
• remote seat adjustment (if equipped)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
128
Remote seat adjustment
The rear passenger can move the
front passenger seat forward or
backward using the control located
in the rear center console.
Move the control forward or
backward to move front passenger
seat.
Remote seat adjustment lockout
The window lockout control, located
on the drivers door, will also lockout
the remote seat adjustment. To lock
out the remote seat adjustment
feature, press the right side of the
control. Press the left side to restore the remote seat adjustment control.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
Position the driver floor mat so that
the eyelet is over the pointed end of
the retention post and rotate
forward to lock in. Make sure that
the mat does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator or the
brake pedal. To remove the floor
mat, reverse the installation
procedure.
WINDOW LOCK
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
129
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with a master key and a valet (identified with
the word VALET) key lock system. The master key will access:
• the driver’s door,
• the trunk,
• the glove box,
• the ignition, and
• the interior trim remote trunk release.
The valet key will access:
• the driver’s door,
• the ignition.
Before handing over the valet key to a valet attendant, lock the interior
remote trunk release control and the glove box with the master key. Do
not hand over the remote entry transmitter or the master key to the
valet attendant.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Press control to unlock all doors.
Note: When the perimeter alarm is
armed, the power door locks are
disabled.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart locks
With the key in the ignition, in any switch position, and either the
driver’s or passenger’s door open, the doors cannot be locked using the
power door lock switches.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
Locks and Security
130
Central locking/unlocking
• All doors are locked when the key is inserted into the driver door key
cylinder and turned to the lock position.
• The driver’s door is unlocked when the key is inserted into the driver
door key cylinder and turned to the unlock position.
• If the key is turned a second time to the unlock position within 5
seconds, all vehicle doors will unlock.
Power door trim switch inhibit
This feature disables the power door locks and trunk interior release
switches if all doors are closed and the perimeter alarm becomes armed.
Once the power door trim switches are disabled, they can only become
active when perimeter alarm is disarmed.
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage childproof locks.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
131
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
Keep vehicle doors and
luggage compartment
locked and keep keys and remote
transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught
not to play in vehicles.
On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can
rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious
heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
132
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key. Note: The remote
entry features operate with the
ignition in any position except in the
4 (ON) position, when the
transmission is in any gear other
than P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If there is a problem with the
remote entry system make sure to
take ALL remote entry
transmitters with you to the dealership, this will aid in troubleshooting
the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
Security lighting
Your vehicle’s headlamps and park lamps will illuminate if:
• it is dark outside (evening),
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
133
• the headlamp control is in the autolamp position, and
• the unlock control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter.
The headlamps and parklamps remain illuminated:
• for 25 seconds, or
• until you turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position, or
• until the vehicle doors are locked using the remote entry transmitter
or the power door unlock control.
Locking the doors
Press and release to lock all the doors. Note: The interior lamps will
turn off and the parklamps will flash, if all the closures (doors, trunk,
hood) are closed. If any closure is not closed, the parklamps will not
flash.
Press
and release again within five seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
once and the parklamps will flash, if all the closures are closed. If any
closure is not closed, the horn will chirp twice and the parklamps will
not flash.
Deactivating/activating the horn chirp feature
The horn chirp feature can be turned on/off through the following
procedure:
Complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or you must repeat the procedure.
Wait 30 seconds before repeating the procedure.
1. Turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel 3 times.
3. Cycle the ignition from the 4 (ON) to the 3 (OFF) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position. The doors will lock and
unlock.
6. Press the unlock control twice within 5 seconds. The horn will chirp
twice to indicate a successful activation/deactivation of the horn chirp
feature.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm. Note: The
panic alarm only works with the ignition in the 3 (OFF) position.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
134
Press a second time to deactivate the alarm. You may also
deactivate the alarm in the following ways:
•
Turn the ignition to the 1 (ACCESSORY), 4 (ON) or 5 (START) positions.
• Wait 2 minutes and 45 seconds for the alarm to time-out.
Opening the trunk
Press once to open the trunk.
If your vehicle is fitted with the optional power decklid, press
twice to open the trunk and twice to close it.
Before operating the power decklid, be sure that no one,
particularly a child, is in a position where he or she can be
injured by the trunk lid. NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter
where it can be inadvertently activated, as someone could be seriously
injured by a moving decklid.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition
is in any position. However, if the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position and
the gearshift is in D (Drive), the trunk will only open if the vehicle is
moving 5 km/h (3 mph) or slower.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
135
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
136
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK)
position to 3 (OFF).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF) position and 4 (ON). Note: The
eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 4 (ON) or the 1 (ACCESSORY)
position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dimmer panel control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
3
1
2
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
137
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
• all the doors are closed,
• the engine is running,
• you shift into gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and.
• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met:
• any door is opened then closed while the engine is running, and
• you shift into gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and.
• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
To deactivate/reactivate the autolock feature using the power door
unlock control
You must complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 4 (ON) to the 3 (OFF) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 4 (ON) position. The door locks will
cycle to lock and unlock.
6. Press the unlock control. After five seconds, the horn will chirp once
to indicate the enabling/disabling of the autolock feature.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
Memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature (if equipped)
The remote keyless entry system can also control the memory
seats/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature. With this feature, the first two
programmed transmitters will recall a different memory position.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
138
Press once to unlock the driver’s door and move the memory features
to the corresponding memory position, just as if you had pressed the
memory control in the vehicle.
Activating the memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, mirrors and
adjustable pedals to the position
desired.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within five seconds, press one control on the remote transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 button on the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with the memory positions and Driver 1 or Driver
2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter, if desired.
Deactivating the memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate
and then press the SET control on the driver’s door panel .
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter, if desired.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the trunk.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on
the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You
can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
SET
1
2
SET
1
2
1 2
3
45678
9
0
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
139
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Enter a sixth digit to indicate which personality feature should be
recalled by the personal code.
• 1 • 2 recalls driver personality 1.
• 3 • 4 recalls driver personality 2.
• 5 • 6, 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 do not recall a driver personality.
All of the vehicle doors will lock and unlock to confirm programming of
the new code. Each driver personality profile (personality 1 or
personality 2) can be associated with only one personal code. The
factory-set code cannot be associated with a personality code.
You can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle.
These codes do not replace the permanent code that was provided by
your dealer.
Tips for setting codes:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
Erasing personal codes
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code. The keyless entry keypad and
interior lights will illuminate and the driver’s door will unlock.
2. Press and release the 1 • 2 within five seconds of completing Step 1.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds to erase the customer
programmed codes.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Note: To exit programming mode, either wait 5 seconds after pressing 1
• 2 on the keypad, or press the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 pads simultaneously to
lock all vehicle doors and end programming mode.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
140
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after pressing the first control on
the keypad.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
Releasing the trunk with the keyless entry system
To release/open the trunk, enter the factory-set code or personal code
(driver door unlocks) and press 5 • 6 within five seconds.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional power decklid, pressing 5 •
6 again will close it (you may need to reenter the keypad code again).
Before operating the power decklid, be sure that no one,
particularly a child, is in a position where he or she can be
injured by the trunk lid. NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter
where it can be inadvertently activated, as someone could be seriously
injured by a moving decklid.
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started
unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of
the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with three coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to
your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to
Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded
key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
141
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 3
(OFF) or 2 (LOCK) position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key
(programmed to your vehicle) disarms the vehicle and allows the
engine to start. The indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for
three seconds and then go out. If the indicator stays on for an extended
period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your
dealership or a qualified technician.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
142
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use Securilock娂 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take
your vehicle to your dealer to have the spare key(s) programmed.
1. Insert a previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 3
(OFF) position to the 4 (ON)
position. Keep the ignition in the 4
(ON) position for at least one
second, but no more than 10
seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF)
position, and remove the coded key
from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key,
insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but not
more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second key
from the ignition.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
143
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealer to have the
new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
from Step 1 for each additional key.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership to
aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, the perimeter alarm will notify you of an unauthorized
entry. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the park
lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any
of the following actions will arm the alarm system:
• Press the remote transmitter lock control one time to arm the system.
• Lock all doors using the keypad.
• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or
passenger door is open and then closed.
• Lock all doors with the key in the key lock cylinder.
If all the closures (doors, trunk, hood) are closed, the park lamps will
flash once and the horn will chirp once when the
on the remote entry
transmitter is pressed a second time within five seconds.
If any closure is not properly closed, the park lamps will not flash and
the horn will chirp twice.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
144
The system will wait 20 seconds after one of the actions is performed
before allowing an alarm to go off. After the 20–second pre-arm phase,
the interior trim remote trunk release control and the power door unlock
control are disabled, in order to further protect your vehicle.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter.
• Unlock the doors using a valid code on the keypad.
• Unlock the doors with the key in the key lock cylinder.
• Turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a programmed coded
ignition key.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
145
SEATING
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to
raise and lower the head restraints.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Using the manual recline function (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating and Safety Restraints
146
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
To adjust the front seatback using
the manual recliner:
• Lift and hold the handle located
on the side of the seat.
• Lean against the seatback to
adjust it to your desired position.
You can recline the seat back or
bring it forward.
• Release the handle when the desired position has been reached.
Front seat armrest
The front seat armrest has a locking feature which is engaged when the
armrest is in the up position and a collision with sufficient forward
deceleration causes a locking pin to activate. To disengage this locking
pin, the armrest must be inspected and serviced by a qualified technician
in accordance with the vehicle service manual.
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located
on the front inboard side of the
seat.
Press the top side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the bottom side of the control
to adjust softness.
Adjusting the power front seats – door mounted controls
(if equipped)
The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each front
door.
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
147
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or backward.
Press to move the seat forward or
backward.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
148
Press to move the front portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
Press to move the rear portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
149
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the ON position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels and
operate like the front heated seats. Refer to the Heated Seats section in
this chapter for instructions on operating the rear heated seats.
Easy-access/easy-out feature (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backward when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
The seat will move 2 inches (5 cm) forward (to the original position)
when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition cylinder
Seat mounted cup holders
Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders in the cushion of the
front center seat and the rear seat . The rear seat cupholder is designed
to over rotate from the seat when subjected to a heavy load. The rear
seat cupholder can be reset by rotating to the closed position.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Memory seats/rearview mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors, and
adjustable pedals to three
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located on the driver door.
• To program position one, move the driver seat to the desired position
using the seat controls. Press the SET control. The SET control
indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated,
press control 1.
SET
1
2
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
150
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
• To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press
controls 1 and 2 simultaneously.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and security chapter.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
• Driver and front passenger side air bags
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front crash severity sensor
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone
• The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
151
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front air bags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage air bags offer the capability to tailor the level of air bag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage air bags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage air bag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver air bag by providing a lower air bag output level.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the air bag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
152
during a frontal or near-frontal collision. This maximizes the effectiveness
of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant relative to
the air bag to improve protection. The safety belt pretensioners can be
either activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together
with the air bags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine
maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
153
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
154
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay
out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help
reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have three types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
155
Webbing extraction sensitive mode
The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents
more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly. The
belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in the
vehicle. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in
the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children
or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
156
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a
qualified technician after any collision to verify that the ⬙automatic
locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected according to the procedures in the
Workshop Manual and must be replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
157
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and front
outboard passenger. Adjust the
height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, push the
button and slide the height adjuster
up. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Lap belts
Adjusting the front center seat lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
158
The lap belt does not adjust
automatically. Insert the tongue into
the correct buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the tongue is
coming from). To lengthen the belt,
turn the tongue at a right angle to
the belt and pull across your lap
until it reaches the buckle. To
tighten the belt, pull the loose end
of the belt through the tongue until
it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
159
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and 1-3 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until safety belt is
buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
160
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
161
Reasons given... Consider...
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
Read steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
162
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled
state. (Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.)
• After step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder feature if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the restraint system warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder feature if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the restraint system warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the light off, then
followed by the restraint system warning light flashing 4 times per
second for 3 seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
163
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
164
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
O
F
F
P
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
20
60
80
40
100
120
160
140
180
MPH km/h
110
H F
E
1
2
FILL ON
LEFT
<
CHECK
TRAC
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
LO
F
S
OFF
MIST
SHUF
MUTE
SEL
BAL
BASS
FADE
TREB
SCAN
CD
AM/FM
SEEK
REW
FF
COMP
563412
SIDE
TUNE
TAPE
RDS
AUTO
SET
AUTO
OFF
DUAL
A/C
R
EXT
F/ C
F
F
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
165
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
166
Children and air bags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
167
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags)
• Driver and passenger side air bags
• One or more impact and safing sensors
• A readiness light and tone
• A diagnostic module
• The electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as the
supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
168
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an accident, they will
not function again ( belt will not extract or retract) and must be
replaced immediately. Failure to replace the retractor assemblies will
increase the risk of injury.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Side air bag system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
AIR
BAG
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
169
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an air bag. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an air bag SRS is provided.
How does the side air bag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side air bag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (air bag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front air bags.
• Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle.
Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
170
The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected
by the collision will be inflated. The air bag was designed to inflate
between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates air bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side air bag has
deployed, the air bag will
not function again. The side
air bag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by a qualified
technician in accordance with
the vehicle service manual. If
the air bag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side air bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
171
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lbs[18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
172
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the
lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk
of serious injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
173
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
174
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
175
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
176
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
177
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
178
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
179
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
4. Open the tether anchor cover.
5. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
180
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors on both sides of the
center of the rear seat are provided
for child seats at the outboard seats,
and are further apart than the pairs
of lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seats. DO NOT
install child seats with LATCH
attachments (rigid or mounted on
belt webbing) to the lower anchors
at the center rear seat. If you install a child seat at the center rear
position, use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
181
The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back. The inboard
LATCH anchors are located below the locator symbols on the seat back.
The outboard LATCH anchors are 11 inches (280 mm) outboard of the
locator symbols, behind the matching slits in the bottom edge of the seat
back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Two plastic LATCH guides can be
obtained at no charge from any
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
They snap onto the LATCH lower
anchors in the seat to help attach a
child seat with rigid attachments.
The guides hold the seat trim away
to expose the anchor and make it
easier to attach some child seats.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
182
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
183
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
2. LOCK, locks the automatic
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all
accessories without locking the
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal
being depressed.
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Refer to the Securilock 娂 Passive Anti-Theft System section in the
Locks and security chapter for information on Securilock娂 keys.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
3
1
2
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
Driving
184
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
185
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
5. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
HOOD
1
2
3
4
5
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
186
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely.
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a
region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle.
The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
1
2
3
4
5
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
187
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little further as soon as ABS braking
is done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system serviced immediately.)
ABS
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
188
Parking brake with auto-release
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked.
To set the parking brake:
1. Move the gearshift to P (Park).
2. Push pedal downward.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is fully released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release. To release the
parking brake:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Move the gearshift from the P (Park) position to one of the forward
gears (the parking brake will not release automatically when you shift
into reverse). The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift is
moved.
HOOD
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
189
If the parking brake fails to release
after completing this procedure, use
the manual parking brake release
lever.
Pull the lever to manually release
the parking brake.
TRACTION CONTROL姟
For Traction Control娂 warning lights refer to Warning Lights in the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control娂 system (except on
commercial conversion packages). This system helps you maintain the
stability and steerability of your vehicle, especially on slippery road
surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads and gravel roads. The
system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in
these conditions.
During Traction Control娂 operation, you may hear an electric motor
type of sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine will
not “rev-up” when you push further on the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior and should be no reason for concern.
The Traction Control娂 switch,
located on the left side of the
instrument panel, allows the driver
to enable and disable the system.
The Traction Control娂 system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned OFF and RUN.
If you should become stuck in snow
or ice or on a very slippery road surface, try switching the Traction
Control娂 system off. This may allow excess wheel spin to “dig” the
vehicle out and enable a successful “rocking” maneuver.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
190
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction Control娂
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the steering
wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than a few
seconds when the engine is running.
It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the
power steering fluid reservoir:
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
Speed sensitive steering
The steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At high speeds, steering
assist will decrease to improve steering feel. At lower speeds,
maneuverability will be increased.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
191
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while
driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system
checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Accelerations
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by
automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs.
If you exceed the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate.
The air suspension shut-off switch is
located on the left side of the trunk.
If this switch is in the OFF position,
the rear air suspension will not
operate.
On vehicles equipped with
Air Suspension, turn OFF
the Air Suspension switch prior to
jacking, hoisting or towing your
vehicle.
Normal vehicle operation does not require any action by the driver.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
192
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
193
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the gearshift lever.
O/D
OFF
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
194
The transmission control indicator
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
195
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If necessary, try turning the Traction Control娂 system off. This will allow
the wheels to spin, which may help to free your stuck vehicle. For more
information, refer to Traction Control娂 (if equipped) in this chapter.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM
The extended rear park aid system sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) gear is selected.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the extended rear park assist system as contained
in this section. The park assist is only an aid for some (generally large
and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the extended rear park aid.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
196
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the vehicle.
The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the extended rear park aid system may create false
beeps.
The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the
vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 mph (10 km/h).
The system is not effective at speeds greater than 6 mph (10 km/h) and
may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The system detects obstacles within approximately 16 feet (five meters),
at speeds above 2 mph [3 km/h]) behind the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. If vehicle
speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h), the system detects obstacles within
approximately 10 feet (three meters) behind the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. In the
figure, the smaller objects behind the vehicle represent the near-vehicle
and bumper corner coverage area of the park aid system and the large
object represents the extended coverage area. As you move closer to the
obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the distance to the
obstacle is less than 18 inches (45.0 cm), the tone will sound
continuously. If the system detects an object that is approaching the
vehicle at such as rate that rapid braking is required, a very high rate
tone will sound. If this tone is heard while reversing, the driver is
advised to slow down immediately until the tone either changes to a
slower rate or stops. While receiving a warning the radio volume will be
reduced to a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio
will return to the previous volume. The radio volume may be overridden
using the radio volume control.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
197
The extended rear park aid is
automatically enabled when the gear
selector is placed in R (Reverse)
and the ignition is ON. A park aid
control allows the driver to disable
the extended rear park aid only
when the ignition is ON, and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse).
The OFF indicator remains
illuminated when the system is
disabled. The system defaults to ON
every time the ignition is turned on. Press the control to disable or
enable the system.
The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the extended
rear park aid.
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). These elements may cause the
system to operate inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and
cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
198
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
199
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the driver’s
door or B-Pillar. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
200
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lbs [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply
5,000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to
750 lbs. (227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lbs. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725
to 2,875 lbs. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
201
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. Do not tow a
trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 2,000 miles (3,200 km).
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components
carefully after towing.
Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Do
not exceed the GVWR specified on the certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6,600 lbs. (2,993 kg).
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
202
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
203
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a
recreational vehicle).
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles:
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel
drive capability.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
204
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
205
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
•
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles,
and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• changing a flat tire
• jump-starts
• lock-out assistance
• limited fuel delivery
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Emergencies
206
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
FUEL
RESET
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
207
The fuel pump shut-off switch is located on a bracket inside of the
luggage compartment.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
208
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey ———
3A Violet Violet ———
4A Pink Pink ———
5A Tan Tan ———
7.5A Brown Brown ———
10A Red Red ———
15A Blue Blue ———
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural ———
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A ——Orange Green Green
50A ——Red Red Red
60A ——Blue — Yellow
70A ——Tan — Brown
80A ——Natural — Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
209
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 10A Lighting Control Module (LCM),
Left-hand low beam headlamp
2 5A Back-up aide
15A Back-up aide, Fog lamps
3 10A LCM, Right-hand low beam
headlamp
4 7.5A Instrument cluster
5 7.5A LCM, Instrument panel light
6 15A EATC, Heated seats
7 15A LCM, Autolamps/PAT/Sunload
sensors, Park/Tail lamps,
Cornering lamps
8 10A Shift lock, Speed control, Air
suspension
9 20A Hi beam headlamps (LCM)
27 25
26 24
23 21
22
19
20
18 16
17 15
14 12
13
10
33
31
29
32
30
28
11
97
8
6
53
4
1
2
RELAY
1
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
210
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
10 10A Restraint Control Module (RCM),
Air bags
11 20A Stoplamps/Speed control
12 15A Instrument cluster, Anti-theft,
Ignition coils, PCM relay coil
13 10A Anti-lock brake module, Traction
control switch, ABS relay
14 15A Transmission control switch, LCM,
Decklid, A/C clutch relay
15 15A Multi-function switch, Turn signals
16 7.5A Wiper Control Module (WCM)
17 10A Digital Transmission Range (DTR)
sensor, Back-up lamps, EC
mirrors, DTR signal to back-up
aide
18 7.5A LCM, Front radio control unit,
Rear audio/climate control
module, Heated seat switch
illumination, Door lock switch
illumination, OHC, Rear heated
seat switch illumination, Mirror
switch illumination
19 10A EATC, Clock, Instrument cluster,
PCM
20 7.5A ABS, Shift lock
21 15A Multi-function switch, Hazard
lamps
22 15A Multi-function switch, High
mounted stop lamps, Stop lamps
23 20A Datalink connector, I/P cigar
lighter
24 5A Front radio control unit
25 15A LCM, Courtesy/Demand lamps
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
211
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
26 5A DTR sensor, Starter relay coil
27 20A Fuel filler door release switch
28 10A Heated mirrors
29 20A Left front door module (DDM)
30 7.5A Trunk lid release switch, Door
lock switches, Left front seat
control switch, Left front door
module, Power mirror switch,
Adjustable pedals, Power decklid
module, Right front seat switch in
rear arm rest (Long Wheel Base
only), Keypad switch illumination,
DSM (memory function)
31 7.5A Main light switch, LCM
32 10A Electronic day/night mirror,
Navigation module
33 15A Front radio control unit, Digital
compact disc changer
Relay 1 — Accessory delay relay (Signature)
or Power window relay
(Executive), Accessory delay
power to windows, moonroof, I/P
fuse 32 and radio control unit
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
Always replace the cover to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
212
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 30A* Radio, I/P Fuse 33
2 20A* Front power point
3 — Not used
4 15A* Horn
5 20A* Fuel pump, Inertia switch
6 20A* Right rear power point (Long Wheel
Base only)
7 30A* Front driver and front passenger
heated seats
8 — Not used
9 — Not used
10 10A* Rear Air Suspension Module (RASM)
11 30A* Rear driver/passenger heated seats
(Long Wheel Base only)
12 20A* Left rear power point (Long Wheel
Base only)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
213
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
13 7.5A* To alternator
14 20A* Rear door cigar lighters (Long Wheel
Base only)
15 – Not used
16 – Not used
17 – Not used
18 – Not used
19 15A* MAF sensor, DPFE sensor, Injectors,
PCM
20 15A* PCM, Canister vent solenoid, VMV,
HEGOs
21 – Not used
22 – Not used
23 – Not used
24 – Not used
101 50A** Ignition switch, Starter motor, I/P
fuses 2, 4, 6, 8, 13, 15, 17, 24 and 26
102 50A** Cooling fan (variable speed)
103 40A** Blower motor
104 40A** Heated backlight, IP fuse 28
105 30A** EEC relay, PDB fuses 19, 20, Fuel
pump relay coil, A/C clutch relay coil
106 40A** ABS module
107 40A** I/P fuse 29, Delayed accessory relay
(windows, moon roof, radio)
108 30A** I/P fuse 30, Memory seats, Power
seat switch, Lumbar, Adjustable
pedals, Memory mirrors
109 40A** Trunk pulldown/latch module
110 — Not used
111 — Not used
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
214
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
112 40A** Ignition switch, I/P fuses, 10, 12, 14,
16, 18
113 40A** I/P fuses, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 31
114 30A** RASM compressor
115 40A** I/P fuses 11, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27
116 30A** Wipers
117 30A** Rear power seats (Long Wheel Base
only)
118 20A** ABS
201 1/2 ISO Horn
202 1/2 ISO PCM
203 1/2 ISO Fuel pump
204 1/2 ISO A/C clutch
205 — Not used
206 1/2 ISO Cornering lamp ground
207 1/2 ISO Fog lamps
208 1/2 ISO Park lamp isolation
209 1/2 ISO ABS relay
301 Full ISO Blower motor
302 Full ISO Starter solenoid
303 Full ISO Heated backlight
304 Full ISO RASM
401 — Not used
501 Diode PCM
502 Diode A/C clutch
503 — Not used
601 — Not used
602 — Not used
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
215
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage
your tires.
T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information
Your vehicle may be equipped with a T-type/mini-spare tire. This tire will
have the words ⬙Temporary Use Only⬙ molded into the tire sidewall. This
spare tire is considered ⬙temporary⬙. Replace the T-type/mini-spare with
a tire of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the
other road tires as soon as possible.
When driving with the T-type/mini-spare tire do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the T-type/mini spare
tire
• Use more than one T-type/mini spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the T-type/mini spare tire
Use of a T-type/mini spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
216
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel Driving Capability (if applicable)
• Load Leveling Adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
217
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set parking
brake.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),
turn engine OFF and block the
diagonally opposite wheel.
3. Remove the spare tire and the
jack. The jack is located in the trunk
(in a holder bracket), on the
right-hand side, next to the wheel
well.
HOOD
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
218
On vehicles equipped with
Air Suspension, turn OFF
the Air Suspension switch prior to
jacking, hoisting or towing your
vehicle.
Refer to Air suspension system in
the Driving chapter for more
information.
4. Remove the lug wrench (A) from
the jack. Rotate the lug wrench
socket out from the handle.
5. Locate pry off notch (if
equipped) and remove the center
ornament from the aluminum wheel
with the tapered end of the wheel
nut wrench that came with your
vehicle. Insert and twist the handle,
then pry against the wheel.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
OFF
A
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
219
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack location
markings:
JACK LOCATION-FRONT
The jack location markings can be
found on the lower outer edge of
the body.
• Locate the jack locator mark (B -
semi-circle) on the body (C)
near the tire you are changing,
then place the jack (D) under
the frame (A) of the vehicle
aligning it with the mark (B -
semi-circle).
JACK LOCATION-REAR
The jack location markings can be
found on the lower outer edge of
the body.
• Locate the jack locator mark (B -
triangle) on the body (C) near
the tire you are changing, then
place the jack (D) under the
frame (A) of the vehicle
aligning it with the mark (B -
triangle).
• Position the jack according to the
following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
220
To lessen risk of personal
injury, do not put any part
of your body under the vehicle
while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is
on the jack. The jack is ONLY
meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the rear differential
as a jacking point.
7. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
11. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Be sure to stow the jack
properly in the holder bracket.
12. Turn on the air suspension
switch.
1
43
25
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
221
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or
the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to
come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
222
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
223
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
224
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
225
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
226
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
Before your vehicle can be towed, the air suspension control in the
luggage compartment must be turned to the OFF position (if equipped).
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
227
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized Lincoln
Mercury dealer for warranty repairs. While any Ford, Lincoln or Mercury
dealership handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require
special training and/or equipment, so not all dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after
taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at the number below.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
228
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide,
after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
229
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing
Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout
the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000
participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
230
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
231
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
232
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
233
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
234
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
235
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
236
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available
from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
Cleaning
237
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
238
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
239
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
air bags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
240
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate
the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a
collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
241
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-41)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
242
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance and Specifications
243
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front of the hood
in the grille.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
244
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.6L SOHC V8 engine
1. Brake fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Air filter assembly
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Battery
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
245
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Windshield washer fluid
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Refer to Refill
capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common
windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should
be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait up to 10 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
246
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
DO NOT OVERFILL
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
247
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by a
qualified service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks can be heard.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
248
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). To protect your engine’s warranty use
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford
specification WSS-M2C153-H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel
economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for
your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
249
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
250
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
251
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. The
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant
section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
252
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
253
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B
(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
254
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
255
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C[–34° F]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
256
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the H (hot)
area.
• The
symbol will illuminate.
• A tone will sound 3 times.
• The Service engine soon
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The
symbol will begin to flash.
• A tone will sound 5 times.
• The engine will completely shut down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
257
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
258
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
259
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
The “Check Fuel Cap” light illuminates when the ignition is turned to the
ON position. It will also illuminate when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Proper fuel filler cap installation is checked automatically as
the vehicle is driven, but not until after some fuel is used (fuel gauge
drops below full). Once the fuel filler cap is properly secured, the “Check
Fuel Cap” light will turn off after a short period of driving.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
260
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline should not be used (particularly in the United States)
if “Regular” unleaded gasoline is recommended because it may cause
these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see
your dealer or a qualified service technician.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
261
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your Service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon indicator, refer to the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
262
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in kilometers or miles).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters
or gallons).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
263
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
264
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
265
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Service engine soon light, charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
266
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
267
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON威
ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
D
O
N
O
T
O
V
E
R
F
I
L
L
P
O
W
E
R
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
F
L
U
I
D
MAX
MIN
MAX
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
268
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
269
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20
miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (66°C-77°C
[150°F-170°F]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).
DON’T ADD
DON’T ADD
DON’T ADD
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
270
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by
an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
DON’T ADD
DON’T ADD
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
271
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
7. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
272
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
273
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
274
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 99 mph (159 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
275
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow. or
AT: All Terrain. or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
276
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
277
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lbs. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the
vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lbs. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
278
Information on “T” type tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare,
at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
279
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire
pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F(6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the tire label or certification label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
280
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help
your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
281
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
282
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm). When you see these
“wear bars”, the tire is worn out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
283
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires
due to the aging of the spare tire.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the
tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire
can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Tire explosions can cause death, personal injury or property
damage. Do not allow anyone to stand near, directly ahead or
behind the spinning tire.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
284
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only cable type chains offered by Ford as an accessory or
equivalent. Using SAE class S or other conventional link type chains
may cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
285
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 4.6L SOHC V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1668
Fuel filter FG-986B
Battery-standard BXT-65-650
Battery-heavy duty
1
BXT-65-750
Oil filter FL-820-S
PCV valve
2
Spark plugs
3
1
Included in long wheelbase package.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide and is essential to the life
and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark
plug gap information.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
286
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid Ford Part Name Capacity
Engine oil (includes
filter change)
7
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
5.7L (6.0 quarts)
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
1
Fill to line on reservoir
Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCON威
ATF
Fill to line on reservoir
Transmission fluid
(4R70/75 E-W)
2
Motorcraft
MERCON威VATF
13.2L (13.9 quarts)
3
Engine coolant
4
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
18.0L (19.0 quarts)
Fuel tank N/A 71.9L (19.0 gallons)
Rear axle lubricant
5
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90 Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
2.4L (5.0 pints)
6
Windshield washer
fluid
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Fill to line on reservoir
1
Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to
Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DOT 3 fluid is recommended.
However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be used.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine
the correct service interval.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
287
4
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
5
Rear axles are considered lubricated for life when the vehicle is used for
normal service. See your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for Severe
Duty requirements.
6
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axle.
For limousine, use 2.1-2.3L (4.50-4.75 pints) of Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A for complete refill of rear axle.
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to
14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole.
7
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C153–H and the API Certification mark.
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item Ford part
name
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
1
PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
Door
weatherstrips
Silicone
Lubricant
XL-6 ESR-M13P4-A
Engine coolant Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow colored)
VC-7-A (U.S.,
except CA and
OR), VC-7-B
(CA and OR
only)
WSS-M97B
51-A1
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
288
Item Ford part
name
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE
5W20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
XO-5W20-QSP
(US)
CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
WSS-M2C153-H
with API
Certification
Mark
Hinges, latches,
striker plates,
fuel filler door
hinge and seat
tracks
Multi-Purpose
Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B or
ESR-M1C159-A
Lock cylinders Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant
Motorcraft XL-1 N/A
Power steering
fluid
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
XT-2-QDX MERCON威
Automatic
transmission
(4R70/75 E-W)
3
Motorcraft
MERCON威V
ATF
XT-5-QM
MERCON威V
Rear Axle
Lubricant
2
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2
1
Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. DOT 3 fluid
is recommended. However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be
used.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
289
2
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles.
For limousine, use 2.1-2.3L (4.50-4.75 pints) of Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140–QL or equivalent
meeting Ford Specification WSL-M2C192-A for complete refill of rear
axles.
3
Ensure the correct transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid
requirements are indicated on the dipstick or the dipstick handle.
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Guide to determine the correct service interval.
ENGINE DATA
Engine 4.6L SOHC V8 engine
Cubic inches 281
Required fuel 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system Coil on plug
Compression ratio 9.4:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Vehicle dimensions Inches (mm)
(1) Overall length 215.4 (5471/221.4 (5623)
*
(2) Overall width 78.2 (1987)
(3) Overall height 58.6 (1489)
(4) Wheelbase 117.7 (2990)/123.7 (3142)
*
(5) Track - Front 63.4 (1611)
(5) Track - Rear 65.9 (1673)
*
Denotes long wheel base
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
290
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
291
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the structure by the trailing edge of
the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
1
4
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
292
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
293
Transmission/Transaxle code designations
You can find a transmission/transaxle code on the vehicle certification
label. The following table tells you which transmission or transaxle each
code represents.
Truck application:
Code Transmission Description
Manual transmission
M Manual 5–speed (AKK))
C Manual 5–speed overdrive (Close ratio)
W Manual 5–speed overdrive (Dana ZF)
G Manual 6–speed ZF
Automatic transmission
Y Automatic 4–speed overdrive (CD4E)
U Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R70W)
T Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R44E)
E Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R100)
J Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R55E)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
294
Code Transmission Description
Electric
H One speed electric
D Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R44E)
R Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R55S)
Passenger car application:
Code Transmission/Transaxle Description
Front wheel drive manual transaxle
R5–speed overdrive (MTX75)
W5–speed overdrive (M5)
Front wheel drive automatic transaxle
A4–speed overdrive (4F27E)
E4–speed overdrive (4FE)
J3–speed (Mazda)
L4–speed overdrive (AX4S)
P4–speed overdrive (4F20E)
X4–speed overdrive (4F50N)
Y4–speed overdrive (CD4E)
Rear wheel drive manual transaxle
55–speed (Mazda M5)
Rear wheel drive automatic transmission
U4–speed overdrive (4R70W)
A5–speed overdrive (5R55N)
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
295
LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln Accessory
found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever
provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Lincoln Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 4 years or 50,000 miles (80,000
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessory products. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Exterior trim kits
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Splash guards
Wheels
Interior style
Cell phone holders
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
Accessories
296
Floor mats
Interior trim kits
Leather wrapped steering wheels
Scuff plates
Speed control
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Engine block heaters and blankets
Peace of mind
Airbag anti-theft locks
First aid and safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
•
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the
front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information.
•
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician.
•
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are
non-Genuine Ford Accessories added to the vehicle by the dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
297
A
Accessory delay ........................114
Air bag supplemental restraint
system ................................165, 169
and child safety seats ............167
description ......................165, 169
disposal ....................................172
driver air bag ..................167, 170
indicator light .................169, 171
operation .........................167, 170
passenger air bag ...........167, 170
side air bag ..............................169
Air cleaner filter .......271–272, 286
Air suspension ...........................192
description ..............................192
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................252
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................188
Anti-theft system ......................144
Audio system (see Radio) .........17
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................193
fluid, adding ............................269
fluid, checking ........................269
fluid, refill capacities ..............287
fluid, specification ..................290
Auxiliary power point ...............113
Axle
lubricant specifications ..288, 290
refill capacities ........................287
traction lok ..............................196
B
Battery .......................................250
acid, treating emergencies .....250
jumping a disabled battery ....222
maintenance-free ....................250
replacement, specifications ...286
servicing ..................................250
BeltMinder .................................160
Brakes ........................................188
anti-lock ...................................188
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................188
fluid, checking and adding ....268
fluid, refill capacities ..............287
fluid, specifications .........288, 290
lubricant specifications ..288, 290
shift interlock ..........................192
Bulbs ............................................96
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....287
CD changer .................................21
CD-single premium .....................17
Cell phone use ..........................122
Certification Label ....................292
Changing a tire .........................216
Child safety restraints ..............172
child safety belts ....................172
Child safety seats ......................175
attaching with tether straps ..179
in front seat ............................176
in rear seat ..............................176
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............238
instrument panel ....................240
interior .....................................240
plastic parts ............................239
washing ....................................237
waxing .....................................237
wheels ......................................238
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
Index
298
wiper blades ............................239
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............88
Clock ..........................................113
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment ...............104
Console
overhead ..................................103
rear ..........................................128
Controls
power seat ...............................147
steering column ......................120
Coolant
checking and adding ..............252
refill capacities ................256, 287
specifications ..................288, 290
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ..................117
Customer Assistance ................206
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................241
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................230
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............234
Getting roadside assistance ...206
Getting the service you
need .........................................228
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................235
The Dispute Settlement
Board .......................................230
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................233
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................93
Defrost
rear window ..............................91
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................269
engine oil .................................246
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........288
Driving under special
conditions ..................................196
through water .........................198
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................222
Emergency Flashers .................207
Emission control system ..........265
Engine ........................................290
cleaning ...................................238
coolant .....................................252
fail-safe coolant ......................257
idle speed control ...................250
lubrication
specifications ..................288, 290
refill capacities ........................287
service points ..........................245
starting after a collision .........207
Engine block heater .................187
Engine oil ..................................246
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................246
checking and adding ..............246
dipstick ....................................246
filter, specifications ........249, 286
recommendations ...................249
refill capacities ........................287
specifications ..................288, 290
Exhaust fumes ..........................187
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
299
F
Fail safe cooling ........................257
Floor mats .................................129
Fluid capacities .........................287
Fuel ............................................258
calculating fuel
economy ..................107, 124, 262
cap ...........................................260
capacity ...................................287
choosing the right fuel ...........261
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................265
detergent in fuel .....................262
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................258, 260, 262
filter, specifications ........262, 286
fuel filler door override ..........128
fuel filler door release ............128
fuel pump shut-off switch .....207
improving fuel economy ........262
octane rating ...................261, 290
quality ......................................261
running out of fuel .................262
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................258
Fuses ..................................208–209
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............260
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................262
Gauges .........................................15
H
Hazard flashers .........................207
Head restraints .........................146
Headlamps ...................................92
aiming ........................................94
autolamp system .......................92
bulb specifications ....................96
daytime running lights .............93
flash to pass ..............................93
high beam .................................93
replacing bulbs .........................98
turning on and off ....................92
HomeLink universal
transceiver (see Garage door
opener) ......................................108
Hood ..........................................244
I
Ignition ...............................184, 290
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................175
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................267
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................240
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................94
J
Jack ............................................216
positioning ...............................216
storage .....................................216
Jump-starting your vehicle ......222
K
Keyless entry system ...............139
Keys
positions of the ignition .........184
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
300
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................92
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................96
daytime running light ...............93
headlamps .................................92
headlamps, flash to pass ..........93
instrument panel, dimming .....94
interior lamps .....................96–97
replacing bulbs ...........96, 98–100
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................95
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........188
speed control ..........................119
Load limits .................................199
Locks
childproof ................................131
doors ........................................130
Lubricant specifications ...288, 290
Lug nuts ....................................222
Lumbar support, seats .............147
M
Message center .........................122
english/metric button .............126
reset button ............................124
warning messages ...................111
Mirrors ...............................103, 115
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ......................................115
fold away .................................116
heated ......................................116
programmable memory ..........138
side view mirrors (power) .....115
Moon roof ..................................122
Motorcraft parts ................262, 286
N
Navigation system .......................25
cd functions ..............................42
destination mode ......................66
DVD location .............................86
map mode .................................46
quick start .................................27
radio functions ..........................34
O
Octane rating ............................261
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................246
P
Parking brake ............................189
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....286
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) ...............................116
Power adjustable foot pedals ...116
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................212
Power door locks ......................130
Power mirrors ...........................115
Power point ...............................113
Power steering ..........................191
fluid, checking and adding ....268
fluid, refill capacity ................287
fluid, specifications .................288
Power trunk ......................127–128
Power Windows .........................114
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
301
R
Radio ............................................17
Rear window defroster ...............91
Relays ........................................208
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ....................137
locking/unlocking doors .........134
opening the trunk ...................135
Reverse sensing system ...........196
Roadside assistance ..................206
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........164
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..........151, 153, 155–158
Safety defects, reporting ..........236
Safety restraints ...............151, 153,
155–158
belt minder .............................160
extension assembly ................163
for adults .........................155–157
for children .............................172
lap belt ....................................158
safety belt maintenance .........164
warning light and
chime ...............................159–160
Safety seats for children ..........175
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............151
Seats ..........................................146
child safety seats ....................175
easy access/easyout feature ..150
memory seat ...................138, 150
Servicing your vehicle ..............243
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................286, 290
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................288, 290
Speed control ............................117
Starting your
vehicle ........................184–185, 187
jump starting ..........................222
Steering
speed sensitive .......................191
Steering wheel
controls ....................................120
tilting .......................................102
T
Tilt steering wheel ....................102
Tires ...........................216, 272–274
alignment ................................281
care ..........................................279
changing ..........................216, 218
checking the pressure ............279
label .........................................279
replacing ..................................284
rotating ....................................281
safety practices .......................284
sidewall information ...............274
snow tires and chains ............285
spare tire .................................216
terminology .............................274
tire grades ...............................273
treadwear ........................273, 283
Towing .......................................202
recreational towing .................204
trailer towing ..........................202
wrecker ....................................227
Traction control ........................190
Traction-lok rear axle ...............196
Transmission .............................192
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....192
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
302
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................269
fluid, refill capacities ..............287
lubricant specifications ..288, 290
Trunk .........................................132
remote release ................127, 135
Turn signal ..................................95
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................290
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................293
Vehicle loading ..........................199
Ventilating your vehicle ...........187
W
Warning lights (see Lights)
.......10
Washer fluid
..............................246
Water, Driving through
.............198
Windows
power
.......................................114
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
........................................101
checking and adding fluid
.....246
replacing wiper blades
...........102
Wrecker towing
.........................227
REVIEW COPY
2004 Town Car (tow), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
303
304
